New standard of marine radar technology through
50 years of FURUNO’s marine electronics activities
21” MULTI-COLOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE
SHIPBORNE RADAR AND ARPA
MODEL FR-2105/2105-B SERIES
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
NISHINOMIYA, JAPAN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER
Before turning on the radar, make sure that there is no one near the
scanner unit.
Serious injury or even death may result if a rotating antenna strikes
someone standing nearby.
WARNING
Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy which can be
harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a
close distance while the radar is in operation or expose yourself to the transmitting
antenna at a close distance.
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Do not open the equipment.
WARNING
Do not place liquid-filled containers on
the top of the equipment.
Only qualified personnel
should work inside the
equipment.
Fire or electrical shock can result if a liquid
spills into the equipment.
Do not operate the equipment with wet
hands.
Turn off the radar power
switch before servicing the
scanner unit. Post a warn-
ing sign near the switch
indicating it should not be
turned on while the scanner
unit is being serviced.
Electrical shock can result.
Keep heater away from equipment.
Heat can alter equipment shape and melt
the power cord, which can cause fire or
electrical shock.
Prevent the potential risk of
being struck by the rotating
scanner and exposure to
RF radiation hazard.
Wear a safety belt and hard
hat when working on the
scanner unit.
CAUTION
Do not use the equipment for other than
its intended purpose.
Serious injury or death can
result if someone falls from
the radar scanner mast.
Use of the equipment as a stepping stool,
for example, can result in personal injury
or equipment damage.
Do not disassemble or modify the
equipment.
No one navigation device should ever be
solely replied upon for the navigation of
a vessel.
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can
result.
Turn off the power immediately if water
leaks into the equipment or the equip-
ment is emitting smoke or fire.
Always confirm position against all available
aids to navigation, for safety of vessel and
crew.
Continued use of the equipment can cause
fire or electrical shock.
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ARPA Safety Instructions
CAUTION
The plotting accuracy and response of
this auto plotter meets IMO standards.
Tracking accuracy is affected by the
following:
WARNING
No one navigational aid should be relied
upon for the safety of vessel and crew.
The navigator has the responsibility to
check all aids available to confirm
position. Electronic aids are not
• Tracking accuracy is affected by course
change. One to two minutes is required to
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
abrupt course change. (The actual
amount depends on gyrocompass
specifications.)
• The amount of tracking delay is inversely
proportional to the relative speed of the
target. Delay is on the order of 15—30
seconds for high relative speed; 30—60
seconds for low relative speed.
a substitute for basic navigational
principles and common sense.
• This auto plotter automatically tracks an
automatically or manually acquired radar
target and calculates its course and
speed, indicating them by a vector. Since
the data generated by the auto plotter
are based on what radar targets are
selected, the radar must always be
optimally tuned for use with the auto
plotter, to ensure required targets will not
be lost or unwanted targets such as sea
returns and noise will not be acquired
and tracked.
Display accuracy is affected by the
following:
• Echo intensity
• Radar transmission pulsewidth
• Radar bearing error
• A target does not always mean a land-
mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels
but can imply returns from sea surface
and clutter. As the level of clutter changes
with environment, the operator should
properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN
and GAIN controls to be sure target
echoes are not eliminated from the
radar screen.
• Gyrocompass error
• Course change (own ship or target)
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Several labels are attached to the display
unit and scanner unit.Do not remove these labels.
If a label is peeling off or is illegible, contact a
FURUNO agent or dealer.
<Display Unit>
Name: Warning Label (1)
Type: 86-003-1011-0
Code no.: 100-236-230
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, do not
remove cover. No user-serviceable
parts inside.
<Scanner Unit>
Name: Radiation Warning
WARNING
Radiation hazard. Only qualified
personnel should work inside scanner.
Confirm that TX has stopped before
opening scanner.
Label
Type: 03-142-3201-0
Code no.: 100-266-890
<Inside of the Display Unit>
ARNING
WARNING
Possibility of injuly.
WARNING
Display unit may fall.
Lock stay before
servicing.
Hold handle when
mounting display unit.
Name : Warning Label
Type : 03-144-1332
Name : Warning Label
Type : 03-144-1333
Code No. : 100-266-290
Code No. : 100-266-300
ANGER
ANGER
DANGER
DANGER
ANGER
DANGER
Electrical shock hazard.
Turn off power before
servicing.
Electrical shock hazard.
Do not touch anode cap
or its cable.
Electrical shock hazard.
Do not touch parts inside
this cover.
Name : Danger Label
Type : 14-055-4202
Code No. : 100-245-220
Name : Danger Label
Type : 14-055-4201
Code No. : 100-243-450
Name : Danger Label
Type : 66-022-2012
Code No. : 100-237-730
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ...........................................................................................................................................viii
A WORD TO THE OWNER OF FURUNO RADAR................................................................................................. VIII
SPECIFICATIONS OF FR-2105/2105-B SERIES RADAR AND ARPA.......................................................................XI
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION............................................................................................................................1.1
1.1 TURNING ON THE POWER ..............................................................................................................................1
1.2 TRANSMITTER ON.........................................................................................................................................2
1.3 CONTROL HEAD............................................................................................................................................3
1.4 CRT BRILLIANCE ..........................................................................................................................................5
1.5 TUNING THE RECEIVER .................................................................................................................................5
1.6 ON-SCREEN LEGENDS AND MARKERS............................................................................................................7
1.7 DEGAUSSING THE CRT SCREEN....................................................................................................................9
1.8 INITIALIZING THE GYRO READOUT..................................................................................................................9
1.9 PRESENTATION MODES...............................................................................................................................10
1.10 SELECTING THE RANGE SCALE..................................................................................................................13
1.11 SELECTING THE PULSELENGTH..................................................................................................................13
1.12 ADJUSTING THE SENSITIVITY .....................................................................................................................16
1.13 SUPPRESSING SEA CLUTTER.....................................................................................................................16
1.14 SUPPRESSING PRECIPITATION CLUTTER ....................................................................................................18
1.15 INTERFERENCE REJECTOR ........................................................................................................................18
1.16 MEASURING THE RANGE ...........................................................................................................................19
1.17 MEASURING THE BEARING.........................................................................................................................21
1.18 COLLISION ASSESSMENT BY OFFSET EBL .................................................................................................22
1.19 MEASURING RANGE AND BEARING BETWEEN TWO TARGETS......................................................................23
1.20 SETTING A TARGET ALARM ZONE ..............................................................................................................23
1.21 OFF-CENTERING.......................................................................................................................................25
1.22 ECHO STRETCH ........................................................................................................................................26
1.23 ECHO AVERAGING.....................................................................................................................................27
1.24 ELECTRONIC PLOTTING AID (EPA) ............................................................................................................29
1.25 ENTERING OWN SHIP'S SPEED....................................................................................................................33
1.26 TARGET TRAILS (ECHO TRAILS).................................................................................................................35
1.27 PARALLEL INDEX LINES .............................................................................................................................38
1.28 ORIGIN MARK ...........................................................................................................................................40
1.29 ZOOM.......................................................................................................................................................41
1.30 MARKERS.................................................................................................................................................42
1.31 MENU KEYS..............................................................................................................................................43
1.32 RADAR 1, 2 AND 3 MENU SETTINGS ........................................................................................................44
1.33 FUNCTION KEYS .......................................................................................................................................46
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.34 BARGE INFORMATION................................................................................................................................52
1.35 RADAR MAP..............................................................................................................................................52
1.36 SUPPRESSING SECOND-TRACE ECHOES ....................................................................................................57
1.37 DISPLAYING EXTERNAL WAYPOINT AND NAVIGATION LINE ..........................................................................57
1.38 ADJUSTING BRILLIANCE OF SCREEN DATA .................................................................................................58
1.39 DISPLAY OF WIND/TIDE/DEPTH INFORMATION ............................................................................................59
1.40 ALARMS....................................................................................................................................................61
CHAPTER 2 OPERATION OF ARPA (OPTION) .........................................................................................2.1
2.1 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................................1
2.2 KEYPADS FOR ARPA....................................................................................................................................2
2.3 ARPA MENU OPERATION .............................................................................................................................3
2.4 START-UP PROCEDURE.................................................................................................................................4
2.5 AUTOMATIC ACQUISITION ..............................................................................................................................6
2.6 MANUAL ACQUISITION .................................................................................................................................10
2.7 CHANGING PLOT SYMBOL SIZE....................................................................................................................11
2.8 ADJUSTING BRILLIANCE OF PLOT MARKS .....................................................................................................14
2.9 DISPLAYING TARGET DATA..........................................................................................................................14
2.10 VECTOR MODES........................................................................................................................................15
2.11 PAST POSITION DISPLAY...........................................................................................................................16
2.12 SET AND DRIFT (SET AND RATE) ...............................................................................................................17
2.13 SETTING CPA/TCPA ALARM RANGES.......................................................................................................18
2.14 SETTING A GUARD ZONE...........................................................................................................................19
2.15 OPERATIONAL WARNINGS .........................................................................................................................21
2.16 TRIAL MANEUVER .....................................................................................................................................23
2.17 ARPA PERFORMANCE TEST .....................................................................................................................25
2.18 CRITERIA FOR SELECTING TARGETS FOR TRACKING...................................................................................26
2.19 FACTORS AFFECTING ARPA FUNCTIONS...................................................................................................28
CHAPTER 3 RADAR OBSERVATION.........................................................................................................3.1
3.1 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................................1
3.2 FALSE ECHOES.............................................................................................................................................3
3.3 SART (SEARCH AND RESCUE TRANSPONDER) ..............................................................................................3
3.4 RACON (RADAR BEACON)............................................................................................................................7
CHAPTER 4 OPERATION OF VIDEO PLOTTER .....................................................................................4.1
4.1 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................................1
4.2 THE VIDEO PLOTTER DISPLAY.......................................................................................................................2
4.3 DISPLAY MODES ...........................................................................................................................................2
4.4 SET- UP OF VIDEO PLOTTER DISPLAY............................................................................................................4
4.5 TRACK..........................................................................................................................................................5
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6 MARKS, LINES ..............................................................................................................................................8
4.7 WAYPOINTS..................................................................................................................................................9
4.8 NAVIGATION LINES......................................................................................................................................12
4.9 RECORDING & REPLAYING DATA .................................................................................................................14
4.10 PLOTTER PRESENTATION MODE ................................................................................................................16
4.11 INITIAL SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................................17
4.12 LATITUDE ERROR TABLE (ON 96 NM RANGE SCALR).........................................................17
CHAPTER 5
MAINTENANCE..................................................................................................................5.1
5.1 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE..............................................................................................................1
5.2 LIFE EXPECTANCY OF MAJOR PARTS .............................................................................................................2
5.3 REPLACEMENT OF BATTERY ..........................................................................................................................2
CHAPTER 6
TROUBLESHOOTING........................................................................................................6.1
6.1 EASY TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................................................................1
6.2 ADVANCED-LEVEL TROUBLESHOOTING...........................................................................................................2
6.3 DIAGNOSTIC TEST.........................................................................................................................................4
CHAPTER 7
CHAPTER 8
MENU OVERVIEW..............................................................................................................7.1
ANLILLARY EQUIPMENT..................................................................................................8.1
8.1 PERFORMANCE MONITOR ..............................................................................................................................1
8.2 INTERSWITCHING UNIT...................................................................................................................................3
8.3 FOR FISHING VESSEL....................................................................................................................................4
CHAPTER 9
DIGITAL INTERFACE (IEC61162-1)..................................................................................9.1
CHAPTER 10 PARTS LIST AND MAJOR PARTS LOCATION .............................................................10.1
Declaration of Conformity to Type (FR-21X5 series)
Declaration of Conformity (FR-2155, FR-2165DS)
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
A Word to the Owner of FURUNO Radar
Thank you for purchasing this FURUNO radar. We are confident you will discover why
FURUNO has become synonymous with quality and reliability.
Dedicated in the design and manufacture of marine electronics equipment for half a century,
FURUNO Electric Company has gained an unrivaled reputation as a world leader in the
industry. This is the result of our technical excellence as well as our worldwide distribution and
service network.
Please carefully read and follow the safety information and operating and maintenance
instructions set forth in this manual before attempting to operate the equipment and conduct
any maintenance. Your radar set will perform to the utmost of its ability only if it is operated
and maintained in accordance with the correct procedures.
FEATURES OF THIS SERIES OF RADARS AND ARPAs
■ Daylight-bright rasterscan 21-inch multi-color, high-resolution display
■ New microprocessing technology with high-speed high-density gate array and software
expertise
■ New cast aluminum scanner gearbox and new series of radiators
■ Easy operation by combination of discrete keys, rotary controls, and menu operation, all
logically arranged and configured
■ Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA) fitted standard, Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA) option
exceeding IMO and IEC standards .
■ Reliable CPA and TCPA warning in any plotting mode, accurate target data.
■ Stand-alone or integrated configuration
■ Meets IMO MSC.64 (61) and IEC A.823 : 1996 as a shipborne radar, high speed craft radar
A.820 (19), and ARPA A.823 (19).
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FR-2105/2105-B Series of Radars and ARPAs
The FURUNO FR-2105/2105-B Series of radars and ARPAs are designed to meet various
customers’ needs and the exacting requirements of international and national standards and
regulations including:
- IMO A.477(XII):
Performance Standards for Radar Equipment (up to 31.12.1998)
- IMO MSC.64(67) Annex 4: Performance Standards for Radar Equipment (1.1.1999 and after)
- IEC 60936-1:
Shipborne Radar Operational and Performance Requirement (1.1.1999 and
after)
- IMO A.823(19): Performance standards for Automatic Radar Plotting Aids (ARPAs) (1.1.1997
and after)
- IEC 60872-1:
Automatic Radar Plotting Aids (ARPAs) (1.1.1997 and after)
- IEC 60945: 1996-11(3rd Ed) Marine Navigational Equipment General Requirements
- IMO A.820(19): Performance standards for navigational radar equipment for high speed craft
(1.1.1996 and after)
- IEC 60936-2:
Performance standards for navigational radar equipment for high speed craft
Models
This series of radar and ARPA is available in the following models:
Model
Freq Band
X-band
X-band
X-band
X-band
S-band
Output
12 kW
25 kW
25 kW
50 kW
30 kW
30 kW
60 kW
Transceiver configuration
TR-up
TR-up
TR-down
TR-up
TR-up
FR-2115,FR-2115-B
FR-2125, FR-2125-B
FR-2125W, FR-2125W-B
FR-2155, FR-2155-B
FR-2135S, FR-2135S-B
FR-2135SW, FR-2135SW-B S-band
FR-2165DS S-band
TR-down
TR-up
Note: FR-2155, FR-2155-B, FR-2165DS are not IMO type-approved models.
All comes with the EPA (Electronic Plotting Aid) standard fitted. An optional ARP-26 board is
available to provide the full functionality of ARPA (Automatic Radar Plotting Aid). Also with
an optional Video Plotter RP-26 board.
Besides the choice of the above models, the FR-2105/2105-B Series is available in the Regular
type (R-type) and IMO type. The IMO type is designed as a primary radar under the 1974
SOLAS Convention on ships below 10,000 GT and also as a high speed craft radar when fitted
with ARPA function (at least ATA by IEC 60936-2). The R-type satisfies the IMO and IEC
standards but includes more flexibility of functionality to meet the fishing boats particularly
(thus, this is an expanded type in other word).
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The table below shows the differences between R-type and IMO type radars. Other functions
and specifications are common. The operator cannot navigate between these two types. Your
radar is factory set for IMO type. If you want an R-type, please ask your service representative.
Function
IMO type
Regular type (R-type), Japanese
version
Range scales
0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12,
24, 48, 96 nm
FR-2115/2115-B:
0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12,
24, 48, 72 nm
Other models:
0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12,
24, 48, 120 nm
Alarm zones
Radar: Target Alarm Zone:
Radar: Target Alarm Zone:
1st TAZ between 3 and 6 nm, 2nd
1st and 2nd TAZs anywhere. Alarm
TAZ anywhere provided the 1st TAZ can be selected for inside (as TAZ) or
is valid.
outside (as off-zone watch) mode.
ARPA: Guard Zones:
ARPA: Guard Zones:
1st GZ - between 3 and 6 nm, in 0.5
nm range depth
1st GZ - Anywhere in 0.5 nm depth
2nd GZ - Anywhere in 0.5 nm range
depth, but needs 1st GZ operative
2nd GZ - Anywhere in 0.5 nm depth
Available on menu
x2 Zoom
Not available
Echo colors
Monochrome yellow or green in 16
tones
Choice of monochrome in 16 tones or
3 colors depending on echo strengths
Program number
MAIN 0359149103
ARPA 1859038103
DISP
RP
1859039101
0359150102
(See page 6.6 to confirm this on the screen.)
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications of FR-2105/2105-B Series Radar and ARPA
ANTENNA RADIATOR
*: In case of FR-2155/2165DS/2155-B, 0.3 is replaced
with 0.2.
1. Type
Slotted waveguide array
2. Beamwidth and sidelobe attenuation
4. IF
5. Noise figure
6. Duplexer
60 MHz, Logarithmic. BW 28/3 MHz
6 dB
Ferrite circulator with diode limiter for
FR-2115/2125/2135S/2135SW/
2115-B/2125-B/2135S-B/
2135SW-B/2165DS.
Ferrite circulator with TR limiter for
FR-2155/2155-B/2125W/2125W-B.
X-band
S-band
Radiator
Type
XN12AF
XN20AF
XN24AF
SN30AF
SN36AF
Length (mm)
Beamwidth
(H)
1260
1.8°
2040
1.23°
2550
0.95°
3090
2.5°
3765
2.1°
Beamwidth
(V)
20°
20°
20°
25°
25°
Sidelobe att.
28 dB
32dB
28 dB
32 dB
28 dB
32dB
24dB
30 dB
24 dB
30 dB
DISPLAY
1. Picture tube
Within ±10°
Sidelobe att.
Outside ±10°
21” multi-color, 1280 x 1024 pixels,
Rasterscan non-interlace at 61.44
kHz hor, 60 Hz vert.
*
SN30AF is available for non-SOLAS ship or for HSC
radar (FR-2135S)
Effective display diameter 275 mm
3. Rotation
. FR-2115/2125/2115-B/2125-B: 24/42 rpm
IMO type
Yellow or green echoes in 16 levels.
Echoes in the same color in 16
graduation for smooth display.
Different colors for marks, legends,
alarms to ensure easy observation.
Yellow or green echoes in 16 levels
or 3 colors depending on echo
strengths
. FR-2125W/2135SW/2125W-B/2135SW-B:
26 rpm (60 Hz), 21 rpm (50 Hz)
. FR-2135S/2135S-B:
26 rpm (60 Hz), 21 rpm (50Hz), 45 rpm (for HSC)
. FR-2155/2155-B: 20 rpm (DC and 60 Hz),
16 rpm (50 Hz)
Regular type
. FR-2165DS: 24 rpm
2. Minimum range and discrimination
Meets 35 m HSC requirements
3. Range scales 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12,24,
48, 96
Note: Max. range for Japanese version is
FR-2115/2115-B: 72 nm, Other: 120 nm
4. Range accuracy 1% of range or 15 m, whichever is
the greater
5. Bearing discrimination Better than 2.5° except 9 ft
S-band radiator. Accuracy ±1°
RF TRANSCEIVER
1. Frequency
X-band
9410 MHz ± 30 MHz (12, 25 kW)
9415 MHz ± 30 MHz (50 kW)
3050 MHz ± 30 MHz (35, 60 kW)
S-band
2. Output power
FR-2115/2115-B : 12 kW,
FR-2125/2125W/2125-B/2125W-B: 25 kW,
FR-2155/2155-B: 50 kW
6. Presentation
Head-up, Head-up TB, North-up, TM
Sea or ground stabilization
FR-2165DS: 60 kW,
FR-2135S/2135SW/2135S-B/2135SW-B: 30 kW
3. Pulselengths and PRR
7. Plotting facilities
EPA
10 targets manual plotting (standard).
Not operational in ARPA mode.
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid for 30
targets automatically or manually
acquired, dynamic and static trial
maneuver, complies with A.823(19).
<FR-2115/2125/2115-B/2125-B>
Range scales
P/L (µs)
PRR (Hz)
3000
ARPA
0.125, 0.25
0.5
0.07
0.07.0.15
3000
0.75, 1.5
3
2 from 0.07/0.15/0.3
3000/1500
2 from 0.15/0.3/0.5/0.7 3000/1500
2 from 0.3/0.5/0.7/1.2 1500/1000
Common features Sea and ground stabilized vectors
and target trails, 3 target data readout
at a time
6
12, 24
48, 96
2 from 0.5/0.7/1.2
1.2
1000/600
600/500
8. Radar map
Nav lines, coastlines, buoys, etc.
produced by operator as required by
IMO and IEC standards. 150 points x
10 areas stored in EEROM.
2 GZs at 3 and 6 nm in width of 0.5
nm, any sector, in ARPA mode.
<FR-2155/2125W/2135S/2135SW/2165DS/
2155-B/2125W-B/2135S-B/2135SW-B>
Range scales
P/L (µs)
PRR (Hz)
2200
0.125, 0.25, 0.5 0.08
9. Guard zone
0.75, 1.5
3
0.08/0.3*
2200/1100
2200/1100
2200/1100
1100/600
600/500
10. Target alarm zone 1st zone within 3-6 nm, 2nd zone
anywhere
11. Target trails
2 from 0.08/0.3*/0.6
2 from 0.08/0.3*/0.6
0.6/1.2
6
Plotted in light blue not to interfere
with radar picture, intervals 15, 30 s,
1, 3, 6, 15, 30 min, true or relative on
RM mode; true only in TM mode.
12, 24
48, 96
1.2
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Parallel index line Choice of 2, 3 or 6 lines
8 ARPA board ARP-26 (Mandatory on HSC)
9 Video plotter board RP-26
INTERFACE
IEC 61162-1
10 ROM card (for digital charts), RAM card (for custom
data) for RP-26, expanded radar map
11 Sub display FMD-8001 (R-type)
OSD, RSD, TTM, etc.
(LISTENER 2 mA at 2 V, TALKER
60 mA max.)
Analog
RGB video, H/V sync for VDR with
optional interface board
Built-in interface for sync signal
20-50 V, 50-400 Hz, or stepper
20-50 V
POWER SUPPLY
FR-2115/2115-B:
24 V, 9.6 A; 32 V, 7.2 A; 230 VAC, 2.4 A
FR-2125/2125-B:
24 V, 10.8 A; 32 V, 8.2 A; 230 VAC, 2.7 A
FR-2135S/2135S-B:
Gyrocompass
Speed log
IEC 61162-1, contact closure or
200/400/500 pulses/nm
Display/Transceiver unit 230 VAC, 2.1 A
Antenna unit 200/220/380/440 VAC, 3ø,
1.4 A
EQUIPMENT LIST
Standard
FR-2155/2155-B:
1 Display unit (Separated to Monitor, Processor unit and
Control unit for –B type model)
2 Antenna unit
Display/Transceiver unit 230 VAC, 5.7 A
Antenna unit 200/220 VAC, 0.7A;
24 VDC, 0.6 A
3 Transceiver unit for TR down version;
FR-2125W/2135SW/2125W-B/2135SW-B
4 Power supply unit for
FR-2155/2135S/2135SW/2165DS/2155-B/
2135S-B/2135SW-B/2165DS-B
Option
1 Waveguide for TR down version
2 Gyro interface GC-8 (built-in type)
3 Interswitch box RJ-7, RJ-8
4 Performance monitor PM-30 (X), PM-50 (S)
5 42 rpm scanner motor for HSC
(FR-2115/2115B, 2125/2125B only)
6 45 rpm scanner motor for HSC
(FR-2135S/2135S-B only)
FR-2165DS:
Display/Transceiver unit 115 VAC, 5.7 A
Antenna unit 24 VDC, 10.9A
FR-2125W/2125W-B:
Display/Transceiver unit 230 VAC, 2.1 A
Antenna unit 200/220/380/440 VAC, 3ø,
0.7 A
FR-2135SW/2135SW-B:
Display/Transceiver unit 115 VAC, 5.7 A
Antenna unit 200/220/380/440 VAC, 3ø,
1.4 A
X-Radiation
None of the equipment or any device used in
it will not give rise to dose rate > 5 µJ/kgh (0.5
mrem/h) at 50 mm.
7 Interface unit IF-2300 (Mandatory for IMO radar)
Electromagnetic radiofrequency radiation
RF power density on
antenna aperture
MODEL
RADIATOR TYPE Distance to 100 W/cm2 Distance to 10 W/cm2
FR-2115
XN12AF (4’)
XN20AF (6.5’)
0.1 m worst case
3.5 m
150 W/cm2
FR-2115-B
(X, 12 kW) XN24AF (8’)
1.4 m
70 W/cm2
FR-2125/2125W
FR-2125-B
XN12AF (4’)
1.1 m worst case
10.0 m worst case 200 W/cm2 worst case
XN20AF (6.5’)
FR-2125W-B (X, 25 kW) XN24AF (8’)
FR-2135S/2135SW
FR-2135S-B
FR-2135SW-B
(S, 30 kW)
SN30AF (10)
-
0.7 m
0.5 m
SN36AF (12)
FR-2165DS
(S, 60 kW)
SN4A (8’)
SN5A (9’)
XN4A (8’)
-
-
1.2 m
1.0 m
0.7 m
1.6 m
FR-2155
FR-2155-B (X, 50 kW) XN5A (10’)
FR-2135S/2135SW SN-30AF: Not available in Japan.
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Category of Equipment Units
Display unit (Monitor, Processor unit, Control unit)
To be installed in a Protected area
Power supply unit
RF Transceiver unit
Antenna unit
To be installed in a Protected area
To be installed in a Protected area
To be installed in an Exposed area
Performance Monitor To be installed in an Exposed area
Precautions for high speed targets
ꢀ
Assume your ship is making 40 kt and a target ship is approaching at 40 kt right toward you.
Then the relative speed is 80 kt. With the antenna revolving at 42 rpm, the target blip
appears jumping to a new location 59 m nearer. This jump corresponds to 19 mm on the
300 mm display using the 0.25 nm range scale. On such a short range you may lose the
track of target in the midst of sea clutter, random noise or other targets. Use one step larger
range scale.
ꢀ
ARPA can fail to track a target when the relative speed exceeds 100 kt.
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFIGURATION OF FR-2105 SERIES RADAR AND ARPA
Your RADAR or ARPA is model FR-21xx
consisting of checked component units. (Check by yourself or your service representative)
FR-2115/2125
FR-2155/2135S/2165DS
FR-2125W/2135SW
ANTENNA UNIT
ANTENNA UNIT
ANTENNA UNIT
Performance Monitor (option)
PM-30 for X-band
Waveguide or
Coax cable
PM-50 for S-band
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
For FR-2125W/2135SW
Power Supply
Unit PSU-001
(For FR-2155/2165DS)
DISPLAY UNIT
RDP-124
Gyro
Converter
Gyro Interface
Gyro
ARPA board
ARP-26
Power Supply
Unit PSU-004
115/230 VAC,
1φ, 50/60 Hz
SDME (pulse)
Video Plotter
RP-26
EPFS
SDME (VBW)
GYRO (HDT)
Power Supply
Unit PSU-004
Interface
IF-2300
ARPA data (TTM)
External Buzzer
Other Radar system
Interswitch
115/230 VAC, 1φ, 50/60 Hz
(Ant and disp for FR-2115/2125)
Display unit
Display unit
115/230 VAC, 1φ, 50/60 Hz (FR-2125W/2135SW)
Antenna unit
115/230 VAC, 1φ, 50/60Hz
115 VAC, 1φ, 50/60 Hz (FR-2155/2165DS)
Antenna unit
See the table in below
See the table in below
Optional Supply
Power
Please specify power supply when ordering.
Optional transformer is required for other mains.
ANTENNA UNIT
FR-2115
FR-2115-B
RSB-0074 (24 rpm, 24VDC): Motor D8G-516
RSB-0075 (42 rpm, 24VDC): Motor D8G-571 --- HSC X-band
FR-2125
RSB-0074 (24 rpm, 24VDC): Motor D8G-516
FR-2125-B
FR--2155
FR-2155-B
FR-2125W
FR-2125W-B
RSB-0075 (42 rpm, 24VDC): Motor D8G-571571 --- HSC X-band
RSB-0049 (16 rpm (50Hz)/20 rpm (60 Hz), 200/220 VAC, 3ø: Motor GOB-8222
RSB-0050 (20 rpm, 24VDC): Motor RM-6585
RSB0076 (21 rpm (50Hz)/26 rpm (60Hz), 200/220 VAC, 3ø): Motor RM-8123
RSB0077 (21 rpm (50Hz)/26 rpm (60Hz), 380/440 VAC, 3ø): Motor RM-8124
RSB0078 (21 rpm (50Hz)/26 rpm (60Hz), 100 VAC, 1ø): Motor RM-8247
RSB0026 (21 rpm (50Hz)/26 rpm (60Hz), 200/220 VAC, 3ø): Motor RM-7398
RSB0031 (21 rpm (50Hz)/26 rpm (60Hz), 380/440 VAC, 3ø): Motor RM-7435
RSB0088(45 rpm, 220 VAC, 3ø 50Hz): Motor RM-9519 --- HSC S-band
RSB0089 (45 rpm, 220 VAC, 3ø 60Hz): Motor RM-9520 --- HSC S-band
RSB0090 (45 rpm, 440 VAC, 3ø 60Hz): Motor RM-9521 --- HSC S-band
RSB0027 (21 rpm (50Hz)/26 rpm (60Hz), 200/220 VAC, 3ø: Motor RM-7398
RSB0032 (21 rpm (50Hz)/26 rpm (60Hz), 380/440 VAC, 3ø: Motor RM-7435
RSB0051 (21 rpm, 24 VDC): Motor RM-6585
FR-2135S
FR-2135S-B
FR-2135SW
FR-2135SW-B
FR-2165DS
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONFIGURATION OF FR-2105-B SERIES RADAR AND ARPA
Your RADAR or ARPA is model FR-21xx
-B
consisting of checked component units. (Check by yourself or your service representative)
FR-2115-B/2125-B
FR-2155-B/2135S-B
FR-2125W-B/2135SW-B
ANTENNA UNIT
ANTENNA UNIT
ANTENNA UNIT
Performance Monitor (option)
PM-30 for X-band
Waveguide or
Coax cable
PM-50 for S-band
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
For FR-2125W/2135SW
Power Supply
Unit PSU-001
(For FR-2155-B)
MONITOR
RDP-124-M-ES
CONTROL UNIT
RCU-011
Processor unit
RPU-011
Gyro
Converter
Gyro Interface
Gyro
ARPA board
ARP-26
Power Supply
Unit PSU-004
115/230 VAC,
1φ, 50/60 Hz
SDME (pulse)
EPFS
Video Plotter
RP-26
Power Supply
Unit PSU-004
SDME (VBW)
GYRO (HDT)
Interface
IF-2300
ARPA data (TTM)
External Buzzer
Interswitch
RJ-7/RJ-8
Other Radar system
115/230 VAC, 1φ, 50/60 Hz
Display unit
Display unit (Ant and disp for FR-2115-B/2125-B)
115/230 VAC, 1φ, 50/60 Hz (FR-2125W-B/2135SW-B)
115/230 VAC, 1φ, 50/60Hz
115 VAC, 1φ, 50/60 Hz (FR-2155-B)
Antenna unit
200 VAC, 3φ, 50 Hz (FR-2135S-B)
220 VAC, 3φ, 60 Hz (FR-2155-B/2135S-B)
380 VAC, 3φ, 50 Hz (FR-2135S-B)
440 VAC, 3φ, 60 Hz (FR-2135S-B)
Antenna unit
230 VAC, 1φ, 50/60 Hz (FR-2125W-B)
220 VAC, 3φ, 60 Hz (FR-2135SW-B)
380 VAC, 3φ, 50 Hz (FR-2125W-B/2135SW-B)
440 VAC, 3φ, 60 Hz (FR-2125W-B/2135SW-B)
Optional Supply
Power
Please specify power supply when ordering.
Optional transformer is required for other mains.
Note: The Display unit RDP-124 for FR-2105 series radar is separated into the Monitor
RDP-124-M-ES, the Processor unit RPU-011 and the Control unit RCU-011 for FR-2105-B
series radar.
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 OPERATION
DANGER
Before turning on the radar, make sure that there is no one near the
antenna unit.
Serious injury or even death may result if a rotating antenna strikes
someone standing nearby.
Power switch
Control head
1.1 Turning on the Power
The POWER switch is located at the left corner of the control head. Push it to switch on the
radar system. To turn off the radar, push it again. The screen shows the bearing scale and
digital timer in approximately 15 seconds after power-on. The timer counts down three
minutes of warm-up time. During this period the magnetron, i.e., transmitter tube, is warmed
for transmission. When the timer has reached 0:00, the indication STBY appears indicating
that the radar is now ready to transmit pulses.
In warm-up and standby condition, you will see the message BRG SIG MISSING. This is
normal because a bearing (azimuth) signal is not yet generated when the antenna is not
rotating. ON TIME and TX TIME values shown at the bottom of the screen are the time
counts in hours and tenths of hour when the radar has been powered.
-1.1-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 Transmitter ON
When the STANDBY status is displayed on the screen, press the transmit switch labeled
STBY/TX on the control panel of the display unit.
The radar is initially set to previously used range and pulsewidth. Other settings such as
brilliance levels, VRMs, EBLs and menu option selections are also set to previous settings.
The transmit switch toggles the radar between STANDBY and TRANSMIT status. The
antenna stops in STANDBY status and rotates in TRANSMIT status.
Quick Start
Provided that the radar was once in use with the transmitter tube (magnetron) still warm, you
can turn the radar into TRANSMIT condition without 3-minutes standby. If the Power Switch
has been turned off by mistake or the like and you wish to restart the radar promptly, turn on
the Power Switch not later than 10 seconds after power-off.
Notes:
1) If the antenna does not rotate in TRANSMIT status, check whether the antenna switch in
the tuning compartment is in the OFF position.
2) The magnetron ages with time resulting in a reduction of output power. It is highly
recommended that the radar be set to STANDBY status when not used for an extended
period of time.
-1.2-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 Control Head
AUDIO OFF
Acknowledges audible alarms, no effect on
visual alarms.
RADAR MENU
for setting various parameters for
radar operation and radar map.
A/C RAIN
Suppresses clutter from
rain, snow, clouds.
A/C SEA
Suppresses sea clutter to
improve the short range
discrimination.
NAV MENU
Sets parameters for nav info.
BRILLIANCE
Adjusts the brightness
of entire screen.
PLOT MENU
for plotting
GAIN
Adjusts the radar sensitivity.
POWER
HL
OFF
PANEL
MODE
3
AUDIO
OFF
RADAR
MENU
PLOT
MENU
NAV
MENU
BRILL
2
1
OFF
LOST
VECTOR
5
BRILLIANCE
A/C RAIN
A/C SEA
GAIN
CENTER
TARGET
ON
OFF
4
6
PM
ACQ
ANTENNA
CHART
ALIGN
EBL
7
MARK
9
#1
#3
#2
STBY
TX
TARGET
DATA
8
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
TUNE
TARGET
TRAILS
CU, TM
RESET
A/C
AUTO
TARGET
CANCEL
EBL
RANGE
VRM
#4
DEGAUSS ERROR
CANCEL
0
ENTER
EBL control and on/off keys
Pressing ON key toggles
between NO.1 and NO.2
EBLs.
VRM control and on/off keys
Pressing ON key toggles
between NO.1 and NO.2
VRMs.
TRACKBALL
Shifts the cursor for plotting,
entering reference points,
etc.
FUNCTION Keys
#1: Set-up 1
#2: Set-up 2
#3: Set-up 3
#4: Set-up 4
TRANSMIT/STANDBY
RANGE Keys
Select the range scales.
-1.3-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3)
(2)
(1)
(12)
HL
PANEL
BRILL
AUDIO
OFF
RADAR
MENU
PLOT
MENU
NAV
MENU
MODE
3
OFF
1
2
OFF
LOST
VECTOR
5
(13)
(4)
(5)
CENTER
TARGET
4
6
ACQ
(8)
EBL
OFFSET
CHART
ALIGN
MARK
9
7
8
TARGET
DATA
(9)
TARGET
TRAILS
CANCEL
CU, TM
RESET
A/C
AUTO
TARGET
CANCEL
(10)
0
ENTER
(15)
(7),
(11)
(6) (14)
(16)
1 MODE Selects presentation modes: Head-up, Head-up TB, North-up, Course-up and True
Motion.
2 PANEL BRILL Adjusts brightness of control panel.
3 HL OFF Temporarily erases the heading line.
4 OFF-CENTER Activates and deactivates off-centering of the own ship position.
5 EBL OFFSET Activates and deactivates off-centering of the EBL origin.
6 C U, TM RESET Resets the heading line to 000° in course-up mode; moves own ship
position to 75% radius in stern direction in the True Motion mode.
7 A/C AUTO Reduces sea clutter at preset level. Permits manual override by A/C SEA and
A/C RAIN controls.
11 TARGET TRAILS CANCEL Erases target trails.
Keys for EPA or ARPA (optional)
8 ACQ key Acquires a target after selecting it by trackball.
9 TARGET DATA Displays the acquired target data for 2 or 3 targets at a time.
10 TARGET CANCEL Terminates plotting of a specified target or all tracked targets.
12 VECTOR Select vector mode; true or relative.
13 LOST TARGET Silences the lost target audible alarm and erases the lost target symbol.
14 CHART ALIGN Aligns chart with the radar display.
15 MARK Enters/erases mark.
16 ENTER Used to save settings on menu screen.
Keys 0-9 Select video plotting symbols. Also used for entering numeric data in any mode as
applicable.
-1.4-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 CRT Brilliance
The BRILLIANCE control on the control head of the display unit adjusts the entire screen
brightness. Note that the optimum point of adjustment varies with ambient light conditions,
especially between daytime and nighttime.
Brilliance
control
A/C RAIN
A/C SEA
GAIN
BRILLIANCE
Note: The CRT brilliance should be adjusted before adjusting relative brilliance levels on the
BRILLIANCE menu to be explained later.
1.5 Tuning the Receiver
Tuning method can be selected at RADAR 3 menu; auto or manual.
1. Press the RADAR MENU key.
2. Press [0], [0], [2], [0] and [0] in sequence to reach the RADAR 3 menu item.
3. Press the [9] key twice to change between Auto and Manual.
4. Press the ENTER key to confirm your selection.
5. Press the RADAR MENU key to close the menu.
Automatic tuning
The radar receiver is tuned automatically each time the power is turned on; thus, there is no
front panel control for tuning. The tuning indicator and the label AUTO TUNE at the top right
corner of the display unit show the tuning circuit is working.
Manual tuning
If you are not satisfied with the current tune setting, follow these steps to fine-tune the receiver:
TUNE control
ERROR lamp (See next page.)
1. Set the tuning method to manual as described above.
2. While observing the picture on the 48 mile scale, slowly adjust the TUNE control in the
tune compartment and find the best tuning point.
3. Make sure that the radar has been set to the best tuning point. This condition is where the
tuning indicator lights to about 80% of its total length. Note that the tuning indicator will
never extend to full length.
-1.5-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Freeze-up Recovery
Video freeze-up or lock-up can occur unexpectedly on any digital rasterscan radars. This is mainly
caused by heavy spike noise in the power line and can be noticed by carefully watching the nearly
visible sweep line. If you suspect that the picture is not updated every scan of the antenna or no key
entry is accepted notwithstanding the apparently normal pictures, do Quick Start to restore normal
operation.
1. Turn off the Power Switch and within 10 seconds turn it on again.
2. Press the Transmit switch labeled STBY/TX for transmit condition.
NOTE: This equipment has self-diagnostic function to check operational software periodically. If
any trouble has been found, the ERROR lamp lights. In this case, do the above procedure.
-1.6-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.6 On-screen Legends and Markers
Target Alarm Zone (Radar) or Guard Zone (ARPA),
1st zone between 3 and 6 nm, 2nd zone anywhere.
Set & Drift values are
accessible on RADAR MENU.
Heading line
Dual-axis SDME
F: Fore/aft speed (- sign for reverse).
SB: Port/stbd (-sign for port)
Cursor position
from OS
Heading marker
Target Data
SOG*
HDG 155.0°
T
AUTO TUNE
Disp 1
SPD 12.0KT BT LOG
12/ 2NM
ARPA AUTO-MAN
TRUE VEC 6MIN GRD STAB
HISTORY 6MIN
ANT 1 MAIN
LOG F 10.0 KT
+ 4.2NM
320.2° R
000
350
340
010
020
RNG 3.5NM
SOG SB -1.0 KT
SET & DRIFT
HEAD UP RM
PULSE 1 M1
BRG 25.5°R
330
030
01
CSE 264.0°T BT TRU
SPD 12.3K BT TRU
CPA 2.9NM
320
MAN ALIGNED
040
TCPA 94MIN
BCR 2.9MIN
310
300
290
050
060
070
EAV 1
IR3
ES1
BCT 94MIN
RNG 4.7NM
BRG 78.5°R
CSE 264.0°T BT TRU
SPD 12.3K BT TRU
CPA 2.9NM
02
TCPA 94MIN
BCR 2.9MIN
BCT 94MIN
1
0
N
S
20
280
270
260
080
090
40
60
80
100
W
E
2
-30 20 10
DEPTH
21.1m
CURRENT 1.2KT
105.7°R
11.3KT
285.6
100
WPT 2
150.8NM
155.0°T
11.7NM
162.5°T
250
240
110
120
01 → +
OWN SHIP GPS
34°40.849N
125°18.115E
+ CURSOR POSN
34°39.039N
X-Band
A/C AUTO
NOISE
230
130
135°18.303E
TRUE TRAIL
140
220
3MIN 1:25
TGT ALARM 1
TGT ALARM 2
12MAR 1998
REJ
13:28
210
150
OFFCENTER
Long-1
... SIGNAL MISSING ...
200
160
GYRO LOG EPFS TRIGGER
VIDEO AZIMUTH HEAD LINE
... ARPA ALARM ...
190
170
180
EBL
VRM
>287.2° R<
240.0° R
COLLISION GUARD LOST
TARGET FULL (AUTO + MAN)
INDEX LINE
>140.9
>10.75NM<
7.00NM
WATCH 11:28
°
<
This cell indicates 3rd target
data or wind/depth data.
Function key
selected
Stern marker
North marker
Manual chart
alignment
Orientation of Parallel Index Lines
*:With the serial speed inputs and SOG selection, if the type of data is changed from SOG to
STW, the label SOG appears in red at the upper right corner on the screen.
Note: For W-type (Washington Ferry), ship's heading and speed are indicated as follows.
AUTO TUNE
HDG 18.5° GYRO
SPEED 3.5KT BT NAV
ANT 1 MAIN
-1.7-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DATA DISPLAY
HDG 155.0
T
HDG: Heading T (True = corrected gyro or magnetic heading)
SPEED 12.0KT BT LOG
Speed data is LOG, MAN etc. showing sensor and types.
When set/drift is manually applied, BT appears instead of WT.
(WT: Water tracking mode, BT: Bottom Tracking mode)
ARPA AUTO+MAN
*
TRUE VEC 6MIN GRD STAB
HISTORY 6MIN
RNG 4.7NM
01 BRG 25.5 T
CSE 264.0 T BT TRU
SPD 12.3KT BT TRU
CPA 3.4NM
SEA STAB: Sea stabilization, displayed objects subject to water,
current.
GND STAB: Ground stabilization, compensated for the current;
stationary objects appear stationary on the display.
Target NO. 01 - 40 in ARPA, 01 - 10 in EPA, automatically assigned.
The numbers are left occupied if targets are lost or intentionally
removed until the full numbers are used up.
TCPA 94MIN
BCR 2.9NM
BCT 94NM
RNG 2.0NM
02 BRG 180.0 T
CSE 200.0 T BT TRU
SPD 10.5KT BT TRU
CPA 1.3NM
Interpreting Course Ex. 180.0 T BT TRU
T: True, referenced to True North
BT: Bottom tracking (referenced on the bottom)
TRU: Vector orientation
TCPA 15.1MIN
BCR 3.0NM
BCT 25NM
1:23
Numerals on division lines Ex. 1:23: Elapsed time since last plot (EPA
only)
RNG 2.0NM
03 BRG 180.0 T
CSE 200.0 T BT TRU
SPD 10.5KT BT TRU
CPA 1.3NM
This third target data area may be used to indicate the graphics of wind
and depth data if the third target data is not interested.
TCPA 15.1MIN
BCR 3.0NM
BCT 25NM
DEPTH
CURRENT
WIND
21.1m
2.2KT
105.7 T
11.3KT
285.6 T
This display cell shows digital readouts of water depth, ocean currents,
wind if associated sensors are in use.
WPT 2
01
150.8NM
155.0 T
Bearing and range to waypoint
11.7NM
162.5 T
Bearing and range from origin mark to cursor.
OWN SHIP [GP]
34 40.849N
125 18.115E
+CURSOR POSN
34 39.039N
Electronic Position-Fixing System, such as GPS, DGPS, DECCA,
LORAN C. Status (Healthy or invalid) will be indicated.
135 18.303E
12 MAR 1998 13:28 LOCAL
Date and time.
... SIGNAL MISSING ...
GYRO LOG EPFS TRIGGER Warning and indications
VIDEO AZIMUTH HEAD LINE
.... ARPA ALARM ....
COLLISION GUARD LOST
TARGET FULL (AUTO + MAN)
*Note: When a presentation mode other than north-up true motion is
selected in true vector mode, TRUE VEC indication appears in
red to alert you.
-1.8-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.7 Degaussing the CRT Screen
Each time the radar is turned on, the degaussing circuit automatically demagnetizes the CRT
screen to eliminate color contamination caused by earth's magnetism or magnetized ship
structure.
The screen is also degaussed automatically at certain time intervals. While being degaussed,
the screen may be disturbed momentarily with vertical lines. If you wish to degauss by manual
operation, open the tuning compartment and press the Degauss switch.
POWER switch
POWER
BRILLIANCE
A/C RAIN
A/C SEA
GAIN
ON
PM
ANTENNA
Tuning compartment
#1
#3
#2
STBY
TX
OFF
ON
TUNE
EBL
RANGE
#4
DEGAUSS ERR
DEGAUSS SWITCH
1.8 Initializing the Gyro Readout
With a gyrocompass interfaced with the radar, ship's heading is displayed at the top of the
screen. Upon turning on the radar, align the on-screen GYRO readout with the gyrocompass
reading by the procedure shown below. Once you have set the initial heading correctly,
resetting is not usually required. However, if the GYRO readout goes wrong for some reason,
repeat the procedure to correct it.
1. Press the RADAR MENU key to display the FUNCTIONS 1 menu.
2. Press the [0] key twice to display the FUNCTIONS 3 menu.
3. Press the [9] key to select GYRO SETTING option.
4. Rotate the EBL control to adjust the gyrocompass reading.
5. Press the ENTER key to confirm the setting.
-1.9-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.9 Presentation Modes
This radar has the following presentation modes:
Relative Motion (RM)
Head-up:
Unstabilised
Head-up TB: Head-up with compass-stabilized bearing scale (True Bearing) where the
bearing scale rotates with the compass reading.
Course-up: Compass-stabilized relative to ship's intended course
North-up:
Compass-stabilized with reference to north
True Motion (TM)
North-up:
Ground or sea stabilized with compass and speed inputs
Selecting presentation mode
Press the MODE key on the control head. Each time the MODE key is pressed, the
presentation mode and mode indication at the upper-left corner of the screen change
cyclically.
MODE key
HL
PANEL
BRILL
MODE
3
AUDIO
OFF
RADAR
MENU
PLOT
MENU
NAV
MENU
OFF
2
1
OFF
LOST
VECTOR
5
CENTER
TARGET
4
6
ACQ
CHART
ALIGN
EBL
7
MARK
9
TARGET
DATA
8
TARGET
TRAILS
CU, TM
RESET
A/C
AUTO
TARGET
CANCEL
CANCEL
0
ENTER
Loss of Gyrocompass signal
When the compass signal is lost, the presentation mode automatically becomes head-up and the
HDG (heading) readout at the top of the text area shows asterisks ***. Also GYRO appears in
red characters at the lower right corner on the screen. When the gyrocompass signal is restored,
the SET HDG appears at the upper-right corner on the screen. Press the MODE key, and the
asterisks and GYRO go off. Align the HDG readout with the gyrocompass reading, referring to
the previous section 1.8. Finally press the CANCEL key to erase the message SET HDG.
-1.10-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Presentation mode,
Description
representative display
Heading Marker
Heading Line
Head-up mode
000
350
010
020
340
North marker330
030
A display without azimuth stabilization in which the line
connecting the center with the top of the display indicates
own ship’s heading.
320
040
310
050
060
070
080
300
290
The target pips are painted at their measured distances
and in their directions relative to own ship’s heading.
280
090
100
270
260
250
240
A shore line on the bearing scale is the north marker
indicating compass north. A failure of the compass input
will cause the north marker to disappear and the readout
to show asterisks (***.*) and the message GYRO appears
in red at the lower-right corner of the screen.
110
120
130
230
220
140
210
200
150
160
190
180
170
Heading Marker
Heading Line
010
020
Course-up mode
North marker
000
350
340
330
030
An azimuth stabilized display in which a line connecting
the center with the top of the display indicates own ship’s
intended course (namely, own ship’s previous heading just
before this mode has been selected).
320
040
310
300
290
280
050
060
070
080
Target pips are painted at their measured distances and in
their directions relative to the intended course which is
maintained at the 0-degree position while the heading line
moves in accordance with ship’s yawing and course
change. This mode is useful to avoid smearing of picture
during course change. After a course change, press the
[CU, TM RESET] key to reset the picture orientation if you
wish to continue using the course-up mode. The heading
line gets back to scale zero.
090
100
270
260
250
240
110
120
130
230
140
220
210
150
200
160
190
170
180
earing scale rotates with a compass signal
Heading Marker
Head-up TB (True Bearing) mode
Radar echoes are shown in the same way as in the
head-up mode. The difference from normal head-up
presentation lies in the orientation of the bearing scale.
The bearing scale is compass stabilized. That is, it rotates
in accordance with the compass signal, enabling you to
know own ship’s heading at a glance.
340
330
350
000
320
North marker
310
010
300
020
290
280
270
260
030
040
050
060
070
080
250
240
This mode is available only when the radar is interfaced
with a gyrocompass.
230
220
090
100
110
If the compass fails, the bearing scale returns to the state
of head-up mode.
210
120
200
190
130
180
140
170
150
160
-1.11-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Presentation mode,
Description
representative display
North
North-up mode
Heading Line
000
350
010
020
340
330
030
In the north-up mode, target pips are painted at their
measured distances and in their true (compass) directions
from own ship, north bearing maintained up of the screen.
The heading line changes its direction according to the
ship’s heading.
320
040
Heading
Marker
310
300
290
280
050
060
070
080
090
100
270
260
If the gyrocompass fails, the presentation mode changes
to head-up and the north marker disappears. Also, the
HDG readout shows asterisks (***.*) And the message
GYRO appears in red at the lower-right corner of the
screen.
250
240
110
120
130
230
140
220
210
150
200
160
190
170
180
True motion mode
North
Own ship and other moving objects move in accordance
with their true courses and speed. In ground stabilized
TM, all fixed targets, such as landmasses, appear as
stationary echoes. In the sea stabilized TM without set
and drift inputs, the landmass can move on the screen.
Heading Line
000
350
010
020
340
330
030
320
040
Heading
Marker
310
300
290
050
060
070
080
When own ship reaches a point corresponding to 75% of
the radius of the display, it is automatically reset to a point
of 75% radius opposite to the extension of the heading
marker passing through the display center. Resetting can
be made at any moment before the ship reaches the limit
by pressing the [CU, TM reset]. Automatic resetting is
preceded by a beep sound.
280
270
260
090
100
250
240
110
120
130
230
140
220
210
150
200
160
190
170
180
If the compass fails, the mode is changed to the head-up
and the north marker disappears. The HDG readout
shows asterisks (***.*) and the message GYRO appears
in red at the lower-right corner of the screen.
350 000 010
350 000 010
350 000 010
340
340
020
340
020
020
Target trail
040
330
030
330
030
330
030
320
320
320
040
040
310
300
290
050
060
070
080
310
300
290
280
050
060
070
080
310
300
290
280
050
060
070
080
280
270
090
100
270
260
090
100
270
260
090
100
260
250
240
250
240
230
250
240
230
110
120
130
110
120
110
120
130
230
130
140
220
140
220
220
140
210
210
210
150
150
150
200
160
200
160
200
160
190 180 170
190 180 170
190 180 170
(a) True motion Is selected
(b) Own ship has reached a (c) own ship is automatically
point 75% of display radius reset to 75% of radius
-1.12-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.10 Selecting the Range Scale
The display range scale is changed by pressing the [+] and [-] keys. The selected range scale
and range ring interval are shown at the upper left corner on the screen. When a target of
interest comes closer, reduce the range scale so that it appears in 50 - 90 % of the display
radius. The range scales are:
0.125−0.25−0.5−0.75−1.5−3−6−12−24−48−96 nm (IMO-type)
(Maximum range for Regular type or Japanese version is 72 nm for FR-2115/2115-B or 120
nm for other models)
1.11 Selecting the Pulselength
The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper-left position of the screen using the
abbreviations shown in the table below.
Appropriate pulselengths are preset to individual range scales and function keys. Therefore,
you are not usually required to select them. If you are not satisfied with the current pulselength
settings, however, it is possible to change them by the Radar menu operation shown below.
You can choose the pulselength 1 or 2 on the scales 0.5 to 24 nm ranges on FR-2115/2125
models (0.75 to 24 nm ranges on the other models).
Selecting pulselength 1 or 2
1. Press the RADAR MENU key to display the FUNCTIONS 1 menu.
2. Press the [6] key to select PULSELENGTH 1 or 2 as appropriate.
3. Press the RADAR MENU key to close the FUNCTIONS menu.
LABEL
P/L in FR-2115/2125/
2115-B/2125-B
P/L in other models
S (Short pulse)
-
0.08 µs
S1 (Short pulse 1)
S2 (Short pulse 2)
M1 (Medium pulse 1)
M2 (Medium pulse 2)
M3 (Medium pulse 3)
L (Long pulse)
0.07 µs
0.15 µs
0.3 µs
0.5 µs
0.7 µs
1.2 µs
-
-
0.3 µs (0.2 µs in FR-2155, 2165DS)
0.6 µs
-
1.2 µs
-1.13-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Presetting pulselengths 1 and 2
Pulselength 1 and 2 can be preset on the PULSE WD 1 and 2 menus. Shown below are
examples of the pulselength setup procedure:
1. To enable selection of S1 (0.07 µs) and S2 (0.15 µs) pulselength on the 0.5 nm range on
FR-2115/2125/2115-B/2125-B model, select S1 at 0.5 nm on the PULSE WD 1 menu and
S2 at 0.5 nm on the PULSELENGTH 2 menu.
2. To enable selection of S2 (0.15 µs) and M1 (0.3 µs) pulselength on the 3 nm range on
FR-2115/2125/2115-B/2125-B model, select S2 at 3 nm in the PULSE WD 1 menu and
M1 at 3 nm in the PULSE WD 2 menu.
A longer pulse provides an increased detection range, but with reduced discrimination. If you
need discrimination in preference to detection, choose a shorter pulse.
Example: To select S1 (0.07 µs) as Pulselength 1 for the 0.5 nm range, display the
PULSELENGTH 1 menu following the steps shown above and hit the [2] key to choose "0.5
NM." Further hit the [2] key until the menu option "S1" is highlighted to the right of "0.5
NM."
-1.14-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[RADAR MENU] key
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 TARGET TRAILS
2 TARGET ALARM
3 ORIGIN MARK
4 INDEX LINES
5 ZOOM*
1 or 2
1 to 10
6 PULSE WIDTH
7 INT REJECT
8 ARPA
9 VIDEO PLOT
0 [FUNCTION 2]
[0] key
[1] key
[FUNCTIONS 2]
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK(GRN CHAR)/
BLK(RED CHAR)/
BLU (ECHO AREA)
BLU/
BRT BLU
3 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2/3
4 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
5 ECHO COLOR
6 SHIP SPEED
YEL/GRN/ COLOR*
LOG/NAV*/MAN
MAN = xx.xKT
(STW/SOG)
7 SET, DRIFT
OFF/MAN
SET = xxx.x°
DRIFT = xx.xKT
NO. 2 VRM/MAN
MAN = xx.xx NM
8 INDEX LINES
9 BRILLIANCE (1)
0 [FUNCTION 3]
*: R-type only
*1: Fishing mode only (one type of R-type)
[0] key
[1] key
[FUNCTIONS 3]
[RADAR 1]
1 [FUNCTIONS 2]
2 [RADAR 1]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
2 EBL 1 *
3 EBL 2 *
4 VRM 1 *1
5 VRM 2 *1
REL/TRUE
REL/TRUE
NM/km (IMO: nm only)
NM/km (IMO: nm only)
REL/TRUE
3 [FUNCTION KEY 1]
4 [FUNCTION KEY 2]
5 [FUNCTION KEY 3]
6 [FUNCTION KEY 4]
7 RADAR*
7 INTER SWITCH
8
9 GYRO SETTING EBL = xxx.x°
0 [FUNCTIONS 4]
6 TRAIL
1/2
[2] 7 TRAIL GRAD
8 [PULSE WD 1]
9 [PULSE WD 2]
0 [RADAR 2]
SGL/MULT
In RADAR 1 menu, select 8 for pulselength 1 or 9 for pulselength 2. Selection available is as
below for FR-2115/2125/2115-B/2125-B:
0.5 nm range
1.5 nm range
6 nm range
S1/S2
0.75 nm range S1/S2/M1
3 nm range S2/M1/M2/M3
S1/S2/M1
M1/M2/M3/L 12-24 nm range M2/M3/L
-1.15-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.12 Adjusting the Sensitivity
The GAIN control is used to adjust the sensitivity of the receiver, and thus the intensity of
echoes as they appear on the screen. It should be adjusted so that speckled background noise
is just visible on the screen.
To become acquainted with the way the GAIN control works, try rotating it between fully
counterclockwise and clockwise positions while observing the radar picture. You will notice
that clockwise rotation increases the echo intensity level. A low gain setting results in the loss
of weak echoes and a reduced detection range. If you turn the GAIN control too far clockwise
for an excessive gain setting, desired echoes will be masked in the strong background noise.
GAIN CONTROL
POWER
BRILLIANCE
A/C RAIN
A/C SEA
GAIN
ON
PM
ANTENNA
#1
#3
#2
STBY
TX
OFF
ON
TUNE
EBL
RANGE
#4
DEGAUSS ERR
1.13 Suppressing Sea Clutter
In rough weather conditions returns from the sea surface are received over several miles
around own ship and mask close targets. This situation can be improved by properly adjusting
the A/C SEA (Anti-Clutter Sea) control.
A/C SEA CONTROL
BRILLIANCE
A/C RAIN
A/C SEA
GAIN
#1
#3
#2
STBY
TX
OFF
ON
EBL
RANGE
#4
A/C SEA control
off
A/C SEA control
adjusted
-1.16-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic anti-clutter control
The easiest way to suppress the surface clutter
is to use the automatic control. Press the A/C
AUTO key. Use of a function key is also a
good method for reducing sea clutter. For this
purpose, presetting is required. Consult a
FURUNO representative.
HL
PANEL
BRILL
MODE
3
AUDIO
OFF
RADAR
MENU
PLOT
MENU
NAV
MENU
OFF
2
1
OFF
CENTER
LOST
TARGET
VECTOR
5
4
6
AC
CHART
ALIGN
EBL
7
MARK
9
TARGET
DATA
8
TARGET
TRAILS
CU, TM
RESET
A/C
AUTO
TARGET
CANCEL
CANCEL
0
ENTER
A/C AUTO key
CAUTION
The auto A/C function can erase weak target echoes.
Manual anti-clutter control
From the fully counterclockwise position, slowly turn the A/C SEA control clockwise. For
optimum target detection, you should leave speckles of the surface return slightly visible.
The anti-clutter sea control is often referred to as STC (Sensitivity Time Control) which
decreases the amplification of the receiver immediately after a radar pulse is transmitted, and
progressively increases the sensitivity as the range increases.
A common mistake is to over-adjust the A/C SEA control so that the surface clutter is
completely removed. By rotating the control fully clockwise, you will see how dangerous this
can be; a dark zone is created near the center of the screen and close-in targets can be lost.
This dark zone is even more dangerous if the gain has not been properly adjusted. Always
leave a little surface clutter visible on the screen. If no surface clutter is observed (on a very
calm water), set the control at the fully counterclockwise position.
-1.17-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.14 Suppressing Precipitation Clutter
In adverse weather conditions, clouds, rain or snow produce a lot of spray-like spurious
echoes and impairs target detection over a long distance. This situation can be improved by
using a function key provided that it is so programmed. If the function key fails to offer a
favorable suppression of the rain clutter, adjust the A/C RAIN control on the front control
head.
A/C RAIN CONTROL
BRILLIANCE
A/C RAIN
A/C SEA
GAIN
1
3
2
STBY
TX
OFF
ON
EBL
RANGE
4
A/C RAIN control
OFF
A/C RAIN control
adjusted
The A/C RAIN control adjusts the receiver sensitivity as the A/C SEA control does but rather
in a longer time period (longer range). Clockwise rotation of this control increases the anti-
clutter effect.
1.15 Interference Rejector
Mutual radar interference may occur in the vicinity of another
shipborne radar operating in the same frequency band (9 GHz for
X-band, 3 GHz for S-band). It is seen on the screen as a number of
bright spikes either in irregular patterns or in the form of usually
curved spoke-like dotted lines extending from the center to the edge
of the picture. This type of interference can be reduced by activating
the interference rejector circuit.
The interference rejector is a kind of signal correlation circuit. It
compares the received signals over successive transmissions and
suppresses randomly occurring signals. There are three levels of
interference rejection depending on the number of transmissions that
are correlated. These are indicated by the legends IR1, IR2 and IR3
at the upper-left position of the screen.
Radar interference
-1.18-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To activate the interference rejector;
1. Press the RADAR MENU key. The following appears.
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 TARGET TRAILS
2 TARGET ALARM
3 ORIGIN MARK
4 INDEX LINES
5
1 or 2
1 to 10
6 PULSE WIDTH
7 INT REJECT
8 ARPA
9 VIDEO PLOT
0 [FUNCTION 2]
2. Press the [7] key to select the INT REJECT option.
3. Successive presses of the key increase the effect of interference rejection, up to level 3. A
fourth press deactivates the interference rejector. Switch off the interference rejector when
no interference exists; otherwise weak targets may be lost.
Note: For stable reception of certain types of radar beacons (Racons) or SART (Search and
Rescue Radar Transponder) as required by SOLAS 1974 as amended 1988 (GMDSS), it is
recommended to turn the interference rejector off.
1.16 Measuring the Range
Use the fixed range rings to obtain a rough estimate of the range to a target. They are
concentric solid circles about own ship, or the sweep origin. The number of rings is
automatically determined by the selected range scale and their interval is displayed at the
upper-left position of the screen.
Procedure
1. Press the RADAR MENU key to display FUNCTIONS 1 menu.
2. Press the [0] key to display FUNCTIONS 2 menu.
3. Press [9] key to display BRILLIANCE 1 menu.
[BRILLIANCE 1]
1 [FUNCTIONS 2]
2 RINGS BRILL
3 EBL BRILL
4 VRM BRILL
OFF/DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
5 +CURSOR BRILL OFF/DIM/M1/M2/BRT
6 CHAR BRILL
7 MARK BRILL
8 TRAIL BRILL
9 HL BRILL
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M/BRT
0 [BRILLIANCE 2]
-1.19-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press [2] key to select RINGS BRILL option.
5. Press [2] key again. Each pressing gradually increase their brightness in 4 steps and fifth
press erases the range rings.
6. Press the ENTER key to confirm you selection.
7. Press the RADAR MENU key to close the menu.
Use the Variable Range Markers (VRMs) for more accurate measurement of the range to a
target. There are two VRMs, No. 1 and No. 2, which appear as dashed rings so that you can
discriminate them from the fixed range rings. The two VRMs can be distinguished from each
other by different lengths of dashes.
000
350
010
020
340
330
030
No.1
VRM
Target
blip
320
040
310
300
290
280
050
060
070
080
090
270
260
100
No.2
VRM
250
240
110
120
130
230
140
220
210
150
VRM
0.66NM
1.18NM
200
160
190
170
180
Active VRM is identified
with this marker.
Measuring the range
Press the VRM ON key to display either of the VRMs.
Successive presses of the VRM ON key toggle the active VRM between No. 1 and No. 2 and
the currently active VRM readout is circumscribed by >.....<.
Turning the VRM control, align the active variable range marker with the inner edge of the
target of interest and read its distance at the lower-right corner of the screen. Each VRM
remains at the same geographical distance when you operate the RANGE+ or RANGE- key.
This means that the apparent radius of the VRM ring changes in proportion to the selected
range scale.
Press the VRM OFF key to key to erase each VRM.
-1.20-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.17 Measuring the Bearing
Use the Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs) to take bearings of a target. There are two EBLs, No.
1 and No. 2, which are toggled by successive presses of the EBL ON key. Each EBL is a
straight dashed line extending out from the own ship position up to the circumference of the
radar picture. The fine dashed line is the No. 1 EBL and the coarse dashed one is the No. 2
EBL.
Press the EBL ON key to display either of the EBLs.
Successive presses of the EBL ON key toggle the active EBL between No. 1 and No. 2 and
the currently active EBL readout is circumscribed by >... <.
Rotate the EBL rotary control clockwise or counterclockwise until the active EBL bisects the
target of interest, and read its bearing at the lower-left corner of the screen.
The EBL readout is affixed by "R" (relative) if it is relative to own ship's heading, "T" (true) if
it is referenced to the north, as determined by RADAR 2 menu settings.
Each EBL carries a range marker, or a short line crossing the EBL at right angles and its
distance from the EBL origin is indicated at the VRM readout whether or not the
corresponding VRM is displayed. The range marker changes its position along the EBL with
the rotation of the VRM control.
Press the EBL OFF key to erase each EBL.
No.2
000
350
010
020
340
EBL
Target
blip
330
030
320
040
310
300
290
280
050
060
070
080
090
100
270
260
No.1
EBL
Range scale
markers on EBLs
250
240
110
120
130
230
220
140
VRM
0.97NM
1.11NM
EBL
210
150
200
160
32.5°T
190
170
180
298.0°T
Active EBL is indicated
with this marker.
-1.21-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.18 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL
The origin of the EBL can be placed anywhere with the trackball to enable measurement of
range and bearing between any targets. This function is also useful for assessment of the
potential risk of collision. To assess possibility of collision:
1. Press the EBL ON key to display or activate an EBL (No. 1 or 2).
2. Place the cursor (+) on a target appearing as threatening (A in the illustrated example) by
operating the trackball.
3. Press the EBL OFFSET key on the mode panel, and the origin of the active EBL shifts to
the cursor position. Press the EBL OFFSET key again to anchor the EBL origin.
4. After waiting for a few minutes (at least 3 minutes), operate the EBL control until the EBL
bisects the target at the new position (A'). The EBL readout shows the target ship's course,
which may be true or relative depending on the settings on the RADAR 1 menu.
If relative motion is selected, it is also possible to read CPA (Closest Point of Approach) by
using a VRM as shown below (Figure (a)). If the EBL passes through the sweep origin
(own ship) as illustrated (Figure (b)), the target ship is on a collision course.
5. To return the EBL origin to the own ship's position, press the EBL OFFSET key again.
000
010
020
000
350
350
010
020
340
VRM 1
030
340
330
030
330
320
320
040
040
050
310
300
290
280
050
060
070
080
310
300
290
280
060
A
A
070
080
A1
A1
090
100
270
260
090
100
270
260
250
240
250
240
110
120
130
110
120
130
230
230
EBL 1
EBL
> 150.3°R<
140
220
EBL 1
EBL
> 150.3°R<
140
220
210
150
210
150
VRM
>3.85 NM<
200
VRM
> 0.00 NM<
160
200
160
190
170
180
190
170
180
(a) Evaluating the target ship course in RM
(b) Target ship on collision course
-1.22-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.19 Measuring Range and Bearing Between Two Targets
Press the EBL OFFSET key, and place the origin of No. 1 EBL, for example, on a target of
interest (target 1 in the illustrated example) by operating the trackball.
Turn the EBL control until the EBL passes through another target of interest (target 2).
Turn the VRM control until the range marker aligns with target 2. The active VRM readout at
the lower-right corner of the screen indicates the distance between the two targets.
You can repeat the same procedure on third and forth targets (targets 3 and 4) by using No. 2
EBL and No. 2 VRM.
Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix "R" or as a true bearing with suffix "T"
depending on EBL relative/true settings on the RADAR 1 menu. To return the EBL origin to
the own ship position, press the EBL OFFSET key again.
No.2
EBL
Range
marker
000
350
010
020
340
330
030
320
040
310
300
050
060
070
080
Range
marker
Target 2
Target 4
No.1
EBL
290
R2
Target 1
280
R2
090
100
270
R1
Target 3
EBL
origin
260
250
240
No.1 VRM
No.2 VRM
110
120
130
230
220
140
210
150
VRM
> 0.50NM<
0.98NM
EBL
200
160
190
170
180
> 140.0°R<
335.2°R
Range/bearing
between targets
1 and 2
Range/bearing
between targets
3 and 4
1.20 Setting a Target Alarm Zone
CAUTION
The target alarm feature should never be relied upon as the sole means for detecting the
risk of potential collision. The operator of a ship is not relieved of the responsibility to keep
lookout for avoiding collisions, whether or not the radar is in use.
The target alarm serves to alert the navigator to targets (ships, landmasses, etc.) entering a
certain area with visual and audible alarms.
-1.23-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The zone has a fixed width of 0.5 nm in the radial direction (depth) and is adjustable only
within 3.0 to 6.0 nm from own ship. On the R-type, the outer and inner boundaries can be set
at any distance. On any radar type, the sector of the zone can be set anywhere between 0 and
360 degrees in any direction.
To set a target alarm zone:
1. Place the cursor (+) at point "A" (see figure below) using the trackball.
2. Press the RADAR MENU key to show the FUNCTION 1 menu.
3. Press [2] key to set start point (point "A") of the alarm zone. The message TGT ALARM 1
(or 2) SET appears at the bottom-right corner of the screen.
4. Move the cursor (+) to point "B" and press the [2] key again. Then, the target alarm zone as
illustrated is created and the label TGT ALARM 1 (or 2) appears instead of TGT ALARM
1 (or 2) SET at the lower-right corner of the screen.
Note: If you wish to create a target alarm zone having a 360-degree coverage around own
ship, set point "B" in almost the same direction (approx. ±3°) as point "A" and press the [2]
key.
If you change the range scale to less than half of the TAZ, the warning TGT ALARM 1 (or
2) OUT appears instead of TGT ALARM 1 (or 2).
5. Two alarm zones can be set as described above. Press [ENTER] and [2] keys in that order
while displaying the FUNCTION 1 menu and repeat the above steps.
TAZ
000
350
010
020
340
330
030
320
040
310
300
290
280
050
060
070
080
Target alarm zone (TAZ) can be set in any sector
between 3 and 6 nm on IMO-type, or anywhere on
the R-type.
A
B
090
100
270
260
When the radar has an ARPA board ARP-26, a total
of 4 alarm zones (2 each TAZ and GZ) may be set.
250
240
110
120
130
230
The 2nd TAZ or 2nd GZ is available only when the
1st TAZ or 1st GZ is valid.
140
220
210
150
200
160
190
170
180
Acknowledging alarm
A target entering the watch zone produces both visual (flashing) and audible (beeping) alarms.
To silence the audible alarm, press [2] key shortly on the FUNCTION 1 menu and the label
TGT ALARM 1 ACK replaces TGT ALARM 1 on the display.
This will deactivate the audible alarm but will not stop the flashing of the target in the guard
alarm zone. To reactivate the audible alarm, press [2] key again on the FUNCTIONS 1 menu.
When an external buzzer is connected, the audible alarm does not stop until deactivation of the
guard alarm.
-1.24-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deactivating guard alarm
Hold the [2] key depressed for at least 5 seconds on the FUNCTION 1 menu. In the IMO type,
deactivation of TAZ 1 deactivates TAZ 2. TAZ 1 and 2 work independent in the Regular type.
Note: The echo watch alarm is given to targets having a certain level of echo strength. This
level does not always imply a landmass, reef, ships or other surface objects but can mean
returns from the sea surface or precipitation. Properly adjust the GAIN, A/C SEA, and A/C
RAIN controls to reduce noise to avoid generation of an alarm against false target.
Inward and outward guard alarms
On the R-type, an inward or outward guard alarm can be selected on the RADAR 2 menu. On
the IMO type, only the inward guard alarm is available. The inward guard alarm generates
visual and audible warnings when a target enters the guard zone from any direction. The
outward guard alarm is produced when a target leaves the guard zone (This is not a guard
zone by definition but some users find this feature valuable).
(a) Inward guard
alarm available on
IMO and R-types
(b) Outward guard
alarm available on
R-type only
1.21 Off-Centering
Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced to expand the view field without
switching to a larger range scale. The sweep origin can be off-centered to the cursor position,
but not more than 75% of the range in use; if the cursor is set beyond 75% of the range scale,
the sweep origin will be off-centered to the point of 75% of the limit.
This feature is not available on the longest range scale. The number of range rings increases
keeping the original range intervals unchanged.
To off-center the radar picture:
1. Place the cursor at a position where you wish to move the sweep origin by operating the
trackball.
2. Press the OFF CENTER key. Then, the sweep origin is off-centered to the cursor position.
3. To cancel off-centering, press the OFF CENTER key again.
The picture cannot be off-centered in the true motion mode.
-1.25-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.22 Echo Stretch
On long ranges target echoes tend to shrink in the bearing direction, making them difficult to
see. On short and medium ranges such as 1.5, 3 and 6 nm scales, the same size targets get
smaller on screen as they approach the own ship. These are due to the inherent property of the
radiation pattern of the antenna. To enhance target video, use the echo stretch function. There
are 3 settings: echo stretch 1 (ES1) to enlarge in bearing direction for long range detection,
echo stretch 2 (ES2) to enlarge in range direction and echo stretch 3 (ES3) to enlarge in
bearing and range directions.
To activate the echo stretch:
1. Press the RADAR MENU key to show the FUNCTIONS 1 menu.
2. Press the [0] key to display the FUNCTIONS 2 menu.
3. Press the [3] key to select ECHO STRETCH.
4. Press [3] until Echo Stretch option 1, 2, 3 or OFF as desired is highlighted.
5. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection followed by the RADAR MENU key to
close the FUNCTIONS menu. Selected setting is marked on the left side of the radar
display.
[FUNCTIONS 2]
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK(GRN CHAR)/
BLK(RED CHAR)/
BLU (ECHO AREA)
BLU/
BRT BLU
3 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2/3
4 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
5 ECHO COLOR
6 SHIP SPEED
YEL/GRN/COLOR*
LOG//NAV*/MAN
MAN = xx.xKT (STW/SOG)
OFF/MAN
7 SET, DRIFT
SET = xxx.x°
DRIFT = xx.xKT
NO. 2 VRM/MAN
MAN = xx.xx NM
8 INDEX LINES
9 BRILLIANCE (1)
0 [FUNCTION 3]
*: R-type only
-1.26-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ES OFF
ES1 - Enlarged in
bearing direction
ES2 - Enlarged in ES3 - Enlarged in both
range direction.
Invalid at P/L S1 and
S2
bearing and range
directions
Use on range 1.5-12
nm
To enlarge more than ES 2
Use on range 1.5-6 nm
Notes:
1) If the 1.5 nm range is preset with a pulselength of S1 or S2, and the 3 nm scale with S2,
the echo stretch is not available on these range scales.
2) The echo stretch magnifies not only small target pips but also returns (clutter) from sea
surface, rain and radar interference. For this reason make sure these types of interference
have been sufficiently suppressed before activating this function.
1.23 Echo Averaging
The echo average feature effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes received from stable
targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the same position every rotation of the
antenna. On the other hand, unstable echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions.
To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, this radar performs scan-to-scan correlation.
Correlation is made by storing and averaging echo signals over successive picture frames. If
an echo is solid and stable, it is presented in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over
successive scans resulting in the reduced brilliance, making it easier to discriminate real
targets from sea clutter.
To properly use the echo average function, it is recommended to first suppress sea clutter with
the A/C SEA control and then do the following:
-1.27-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Press the RADAR MENU key and the [0] key to show the FUNCTIONS 2 menu.
[FUNCTIONS 2]
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK(GRN CHAR)/
BLK(RED CHAR)/
BLU (ECHO AREA)
BLU/
BRT BLU
3 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2/3
4 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
5 ECHO COLOR
6 SHIP SPEED
YEL/GRN/COLOR*
LOG/NAV*/MAN
MAN = xx.xKT (STW/SOG)
OFF/MAN
7 SET, DRIFT
SET = xxx.x°
DRIFT = xx.xKT
NO. 2 VRM/MAN
MAN = xx.xx NM
8 INDEX LINES
9 BRILLIANCE (1)
0 [FUNCTION 3]
*: R-type only
2. Press the [4] key to select ECHO AVERAGE.
3. Press [4] until echo average option 1, 2, 3 or OFF as desired is highlighted.
OFF: No averaging effect
1:
Helps distinguish targets from sea clutter and suppresses brilliance of unstable
echoes
2:
3:
Distinguishes small stationary targets such as navigation buoys.
Stably displays distant targets.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection followed by the RADAR MENU key to
close the FUNCTIONS menu.
(a) Echo average OFF (b) Echo average ON
Echo averaging uses scan-to-scan signal correlation technique based on the true motion over
the ground of each target. Thus, small stationary targets such as buoys will be shown while
suppressing random echoes such as sea clutter. True echo average is not however effective for
picking up small targets running at high speeds over the ground.
Echo average is inoperable when a gyrocompass signal is not available. If you wish to use this
feature without a gyrocompass signal, consult a FURUNO representative.
-1.28-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual speed entry is done at menu item 6 SHIP'S SPEED on the FUNCTIONS 2 menu
which is accessed by pressing the RADAR MENU key.
CAUTION
Do not use the Echo Average function
under heavy pitching and rolling loss of
target detection can result.
1.24 Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA)
A maximum 10 operator-selected targets can be plotted electronically to assess their motion
trend. Five past positions can be displayed for each of the plotted targets. If you enter a 6th
plot on a certain target, the oldest plot (past position) will be erased.
A vector appears when you enter a second plot for the target and is updated each time a new
plot is entered. The vector shows the target motion trend based on its latest two plots. The
vector origin will move across the screen at a rate and direction defined by the calculated true
course and speed until a next manual plotting.
Target data is shown in the data display area which shows:
bearing, course, speed, CPA, TCPA, calculated true course of targets, calculated true speed of
targets
EPA time
Target Data
HDG 155.0°
T
AUTO TUNE
Disp 1
SPD 12.0KT BT LOG
12/ 2NM
EPA
ANT 1 MAIN
LOG F 10.0 KT
SB -1.0 KT
9.5
+ 4.2NM
REL VECTOR 6MIN 3:20
000
320.2° R
350
010
3:20
1:25
020
340
RNG 3.5NM
HEAD UP RM
PULSE 1 M1
BRG 25.5°R
330
030
01
CSE 264.0°T BT TRU
SPD 12.3K BT TRU
CPA 2.9NM
320
040
050
TCPA 6MIN
BCR 2.9MIN
310
300
290
EAV 1
IR3
ES1
BCT 6MIN
RNG 4.7NM
BRG 78.5°R
060
070
080
090
CSE 264.0°T BT TRU
SPD 12.3K BT TRU
CPA 0NM
02
TCPA 23MIN
BCR 0MIN
BCT 23MIN
1
0
20
N
S
280
270
260
40
60
W
E
80
2
100
-30 20 10
DEPTH
21.1m
CURRENT 1.2KT
105.7°R
11.3KT
285.6
100
WPT 2
150.8NM
155.0°T
11.7NM
162.5°T
250
240
110
120
01 → +
OWN SHIP GPS
34°40.849N
125°18.115E
+ CURSOR POSN
34°39.039N
X-Band
A/C AUTO
NOISE
230
130
135°18.303E
TRUE TRAIL
140
220
3MIN 1:25
TGT ALARM 1
TGT ALARM 2
12MAR 1998
REJ
13:28
210
150
OFFCENTER
Long-1
EBL
287.2° R
240.0° R
... SIGNAL MISSING ...
200
160
GYRO LOG EPFS TRIGGER
VIDEO AZIMUTH HEAD LINE
... ARPA ALARM ...
190
170
180
VRM
10.75NM
7.00NM
COLLISION GUARD LOST
TARGET FULL (AUTO + MAN)
INDEX LINE
140.9
°
-1.29-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Target 2 is on a collision course as the extension of the vector goes through the own ship
position. Placing the offset EBL will be a help for assessment. TCPA is counted up to 99.9
min and beyond this it is indicated as TCPA > 99.9 MIN.
Note: EPA requires own ship's speed input (automatic or manual) and a heading signal. The
vector and data is updated automatically every 1-2 scenes between plot entries, but do not
neglect to plot a new position over a long period of time. The accuracy will be reduced. Note
the plots will be lost when the compass fails; start the plotting exercise again.
Plotting a target
To perform electronic plotting:
1. Place the cursor(+) on a target of interest by operating the trackball.
2. Press the ACQ key and one of numeric keys, and the plot symbol with number appears at
the cursor position.
3. Watching the EPA time shown at the upper right margin of the screen, wait for at least 30
seconds. Place the cursor (+) on the target at its new location, press the ACQ key, and the
same numeric key for the target.
The plot symbol moves to the new target position and previous position is marked by a
small dot.
4. To acquire other targets, repeat the above steps selecting different plot number.
Note: If a target once plotted is not plotted again within 10 minutes, the warning "UPDATE
PLOT" will appear in red on the upper right margin of the screen and the plot symbol of the
target flashes. If you want to continue plotting this target, reacquire it within 5 minutes.
Otherwise, the target will be regarded as a "lost target" and its plot symbol and target data will
be erased. The larger the plotting interval, the less accurate the plotted target data. Plotting of
each target should normally be made every 3 or 6 minutes as far as possible. You can use a
Watch Alarm to warn yourself every 3 or 6 min or whichever you may set.
Within 5 seconds, you can cancel a last plot by CANCEL key and make a re-entry at a
different position. After 5 seconds, the last entry is processed to produce a vector.
True or relative vector
Vectors can be displayed relative to own ship's heading (Relative) or with reference to the
north (True). Press the VECTOR key to select the required mode. This feature is available in
all presentation modes (gyrocompass must be working correctly). The current vector mode is
indicated at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Vector time
Vector time (or the length of vectors) can be set to 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 15 or 30 min and
the selected vector time is indicated at the upper-right corner of the screen.
1. Press the PLOT MENU key, and [1] key several times until the desired vector time is
reached.
-1.30-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[EPA]
1 VECTOR TIME
30SEC/1/2/3/6/12/15/30 MIN
2 COLLISION ALARM OFF/ON
CPA x.x NM*
TCPA xx.x MIN*
STD/LARGE
OFF/ON
*: Setting range
CPA: 0.0 to 9.9 NM
TCPA: 1.0 to 99.9 MIN
3 MARK
4 PLOT NO.
2. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm your selection.
3. Press the PLOT MENU key to close the menu. The vector tip shows an estimated position
of the target after the selected vector time elapses. It can be valuable to extend the vector
length to evaluate the risk of collision with any target.
Target data
The radar calculates motion trends (range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and TCPA) of all
plotted targets.
In head-up and head-up true bearing modes, target bearing, course and speed shown in the
upper-right target data field become true (T) relative to north or relative (R) relative to own
ship in accordance with true/relative vector setting. In north-up, course-up, and True Motion
modes, the target data field always displays true bearing, true course and speed over the
ground.
Reading the target data
Press the ACQ key and corresponding numeric key, and the following target data is displayed.
RNG/BRG (Range/Bearing): Range and bearing from own ship to last-plotted target with
suffix "T" (True) or "R" (Relative) plot symbol.
CSE/SPD (Course/Speed): Course and speed are displayed for the last-plotted target with
suffix "T" (True) or :"R" (Relative) plot symbol.
CPA/TCPA: CPA (Closest Point of Approach) is a closest range the target will approach to
own ship. TCPA is the Time to CPA. Both CPA and TCPA are automatically calculated.
TCPA is counted up to 99.9 min and beyond this, it is indicated as TCPA > *99.9 MIN.
BCR/BCT: BCR (Bow Cross Range) is the range at which target will cross own ship's bow.
BCT (Bow Cross Time) is the estimated time at which target will cross own ship's bow. If
BCR is negative, BCR/BCT readout should be displayed as *.*.
Terminating target plotting
With EPA you can plot up to 10 targets. You may wish to terminate plotting of less important
targets to newly plot other threatening targets.
By Symbol: To terminate plotting of a certain target, press the TARGET CANCEL key and
then press the corresponding plot number key.
With Trackball: Place the cursor (+) on a target which you do not want to be tracked any
longer by operating the trackball and press the TARGET CANCEL key.
All Targets: To terminate plotting of all targets at once, press and hold the TARGET
-1.31-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CANCEL key until all plot symbols and marks disappear in about 3 seconds.
Setting CPA/TCPA Alarm Ranges
When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm range and its
predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, the EPA releases an aural alarm and
displays the warning label COLLISION on the screen. In addition, the EPA symbol changes
to a triangle and flashes together with its vector.
Provided that this feature is used correctly, it will help prevent the risk of collision by alerting
you to threatening targets. It is important that GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar
controls are properly adjusted.
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size, tonnage,
speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.
CAUTION
CPA/TCPA
The CPA/TCPA alarm feature should never be relied upon as the sole means for detecting the
risk of collision. The navigator is not relieved of the responsibility to keep visual lookout for
avoiding collisions, whether or not the radar or other plotting aid is in use.
To set the CPA/TCPA alarm ranges:
1. Press the PLOT MENU key to show the EPA menu.
2. Press the [2] key to select COLLISION ALARM ON. At this point, a highlight cursor
appears at the "CPA x.x NM" field.
3. Enter the CPA alarm range in nautical miles (0.0 to 9.9 nm) without omitting leading
zeroes, if any, and press the ENTER key. The highlight cursor now moves to the "TCPA
xx.x MIN" field.
4. Enter the TCPA alarm limit in minutes (1.0 to 99.9 min) without omitting leading zeroes, if
any, and press the ENTER key.
5. Press the PLOT MENU key to close the menu.
-1.32-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Silencing CPA/TCPA audible alarm
Press the AUDIO OFF key to acknowledge and silence the CPA/TCPA audible alarm.
The warning label COLLISION and the flashing of the triangle plot symbol and vector remain
on the screen until the dangerous situation is gone or you intentionally terminate tracking of
the target by using the CANCEL key.
Changing size of the plotting symbols
You can change the size of the plotting symbols as the procedure shown below:
1. Press the PLOT MENU key to show the EPA menu.
2. Press the [3] key two or three times until plot symbol size option STD (standard) or
LARGE is highlighted.
3. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection followed by the PLOT MENU key to
close the PLOT menu.
1.25 Entering Own Ship's Speed
EPA and any azimuth stabilized presentation modes require an own ship speed input and
compass signal. The speed can be entered from a speed log (automatic) or through the plotting
keypad (manual).
Automatic speed input
1. Press the RADAR MENU key and the [0] key to show the FUNCTIONS 2 menu.
[FUNCTIONS 2]
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK(GRN CHAR)/
BLK(RED CHAR)/
BLU (ECHO AREA)
BLU/
BRT BLU
3 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2/3
4 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
5 ECHO COLOR
6 SHIP SPEED
YEL/GRN/COLOR*
LOG/NAV*/MAV
MAN = xx.xKT (STW/SOG)
OFF/MAN
SOG (Speed-over-the-ground) is the Speed Made
Good over the ground determined by EPFS, Echo
Reference or Dual-axis speed log. It is obtained
by a distance between two points over the ground
divided by the time spent for travelling between
those two points
7 SET, DRIFT
SET = xxx.x°
DRIFT = xx.xKT
NO. 2 VRM/MAN
MAN = xx.xx NM
8 INDEX LINES
9 BRILLIANCE (1)
0 [FUNCTION 3]
*:R- type only
2. Press the [6] key to select menu item 6 SHIP SPEED.
3. Press the [6] key to select (or highlight) LOG option.
-1.33-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. When the serial speed data is selected at the installation menu, select the speed mode,
STW (speed through the water) or SOG (speed over the ground). If pulse speed data is
selected, the STB/SOG does not appear.
5. Press the ENTER key to confirm your selection followed by the RADAR MENU key to
close the FUNCTIONS menu. The ship's speed readout at the screen top shows own
ship's speed fed from the speed log followed by the label "LOG."
Notes:
1) IMO Resolution A.823(19) for ARPA recommends that a speed log to be interfaced with
an ARPA should be capable of providing through-the-water speed.
2) Be sure not to select LOG when a speed log is not connected. If the log signal is not
provided, the ship's speed readout at the screen top will be blank.
3) SPEED **.* and SIGNAL MISSING “ LOG” appears if no log signal is present for 30 s
while the ship speed has been more than 5.0 kt.
4) With the serial speed inputs and SOG selection, if the type of data is changed from SOG
to STW, the label SOG appears in red at the upper right corner on the screen.
Manual speed input
1. Press the RADAR MENU and [0] key to show the FUNCTIONS 2 menu.
2. Press the [6] key to select menu 6 SHIP'S SPEED.
3. Press the [6] key to select (or highlight) MAN option.
4. Press the ENTER key to confirm selection. At this point, "MAN = XX.X KT" appears on
the FUNCTIONS 2 menu.
5. Enter the ship speed by hitting corresponding numeric keys followed by the ENTER
without omitting leading zeros, if any. For example, if the ship speed is 8 knots, [0] [8]
[ENTER].
6. Press the RADAR MENU key to close FUNCTIONS menu. The ship speed readout at the
screen top shows own ship speed entered followed by the label "MAN."
-1.34-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.26 Target Trails (Echo Trails)
It is possible to display the trails by the radar echoes of targets in the form of synthetic
afterglow. The afterglow can be selected in a single tone or gradual shading as set on RADAR
1 menu.
Trail gradation
Echo trails may be shown in monotone or gradual shading. Gradual shading paints the trails
getting thinner with time just like the afterglow on an analog PPI radar.
(Monotone (SGL))
(Gradual shading (MULT))
- Press the [7] key to select menu item 7 TRAIL GRAD (graduation) in step 4, and
- Press the [7] key to select (or highlight) SGL (single tone) or MULT (multiple shading)
option in step 5.
True or relative trails
You may display echo trails in true or relative motion (only true trail on TM). Relative trails
show relative movements between targets and own ship. True motion trails require a
gyrocompass signal and own ship speed input to cancel out own ship's movement and present
true target movements in accordance with their over-the-ground speeds and courses.
(b) Relative target trails - all
targets moving relative to own
ship
(a) True target trails - no smearing
of stationary targets
Note: When true trail is selected on the RM mode, the legend TRUE TRAIL appears in red.
No true-relative selection on TM, it is only True trails on TM mode.
To select true or relative echo trail presentation:
1. Press the RADAR MENU key to show the FUNCTIONS 1 menu.
2. Press the [0] key twice for FUNCTION 3 menu, then [2] key to show the RADAR 1 menu.
3. Press the [6] key to select menu item 6 TRAIL.
4. Press the [6] key to select (or highlight) REL (Relative) or TRUE option.
5. Press the ENTER key to confirm your selection; then RADAR MENU key to close the
menu.
-1.35-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press [RADAR MENU] key.
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 TARGET TRAILS
2 TARGET ALARM
3 ORIGIN MARK
4 INDEX LINES
5 ZOOM*
1 or 2
1 to 10
6 PULSE WIDTH
7 INT REJECT
8 ARPA
9 VIDEO PLOT
0 [FUNCTION 2]
Press [0] key.
[FUNCTIONS 2]
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK(GRN CHAR)/
BLK(RED CHAR)/
BLU (ECHO AREA)
BLU/
BRT BLU
3 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2/3
4 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
5 ECHO COLOR
6 SHIP SPEED
YEL/GRN/COLOR*
LOG/NAV*/MAN
MAN = xx.xKT
(STW/SOG)
7 SET, DRIFT
OFF/MAN
SET = xxx.x°
DRIFT = xx.xKT
NO. 2 VRM/MAN
MAN = xx.xx NM
8 INDEX LINES
9 BRILLIANCE (1)
0 [FUNCTION 3]
*: R-type only
Press [0] key.
[FUNCTIONS 3]
1 [FUNCTIONS 2]
[RADAR 1]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
2 [RADAR 1]
2 EBL 1 *
3 EBL 2 *
4 VRM 1 *1
5 VRM 2 *1
6 TRAIL
REL/TRUE
REL/TRUE
3 [FUNCTION KEY 1]
4 [FUNCTION KEY 2]
5 [FUNCTION KEY 3]
6 [FUNCTION KEY 4]
7 RADAR*
REL/TRUE
SGL/MULT
1/2
[2] 7 TRAIL GRAD
8 [PULSE WD 1]
9 [PULSE WD 2]
0 [RADAR 2]
8
9 GYRO SETTING
EBL = xxx.x°
0 [FUNCTIONS 4]
*1: Fishing mode only (one type of R-type)
-1.36-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying and erasing echo trails
Press the RADAR MENU and [1] key to activate or deactivate the echo trails feature.
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 TARGET TRAILS
2 TARGET ALARM
3 ORIGIN MARK
4 INDEX LINES
5 ZOOM*
1 or 2
1 to 10
6 PULSE WIDTH
7 INT REJECT
8 ARPA
9 VIDEO PLOT
0 [FUNCTION 2]
*: R-type only
Each press of the [1] key within 5 seconds cyclically changes echo trail length (time) as
below:
OFF - 30 s - 1 min - 3 min - 5 min - 15 min - 30 min - continuous - OFF
The current echo trail setting is displayed at the lower-right corner of the screen.
Suppose that "3 MIN" has just been selected. If the [1] key is hit on the FUNCTION 1 menu
more than 5 seconds later, echo trails are removed from the display (memory still alive with
echo trail timer count going on). Next hitting of the key calls out the echo trails on the screen.
To proceed to longer plot intervals, successively push the [1] key with a hit-and-release action.
The larger the echo trail length, the larger the echo trail plot interval.
Note: Holding the [1] key depressed for about 3 seconds on the FUNCTION 1 menu will
cause a loss of echo trail data so far stored in an memory.
Resetting echo trails
To reset (or clear) the echo trail memory, hold the TARGET TRAILS CANCEL key
depressed for about 3 seconds. Echo trails are cleared and the trailing process restarts from
time count zero at current echo trail plot interval. When memory assigned to echo trailing
becomes the echo trail timer at the lower-right corner of the screen freezes and the oldest
trails are erased to show the latest trails.
R/N/W versions: The TARGET TRAILS CANCEL key can be functioned as follows;
(a) Pressing the key within 3 seconds after the first press selects the trail time: 30 seconds, 1
min., and then 3 min.
(b) Pressing the key after more than 3 seconds from the first press tums off/on the trail
display.
(c) Pressing the key for more than 2 seconds turns off the trail display with a beep. The trail
memory is cleared. The next press for more than 2 seconds turns on the trail display and
new trailing starts.
-1.37-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.27 Parallel Index Lines
Parallel index lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship and a
coastline or a partner ship when navigating. Index lines are drawn in parallel with the No. 2
EBL (No. 2 EBL must be active). The orientation of the index lines is controlled with the
EBL control (without effecting the EBL indication) and the intervals between the lines
adjusted with the VRM rotary control (provided that No. 2 VRM is active).
Maximum number of the index line can be set on INITIAL SETTING 3 menu: 2, 3 or 6.
NO.2 EBL
Parallel Index Lines
Displaying and erasing the index lines
1. Press the RADAR MENU and [4] key, and the index lines appears.
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 TARGET TRAILS
2 TARGET ALARM
3 ORIGIN MARK
4 INDEX LINES
5 ZOOM*
1 or 2
1 to 10
6 PULSE WIDTH
7 INT REJECT
8 ARPA
9 VIDEO PLOT
0 [FUNCTION 2]
*: R-type only
2. Orient the index lines in a desired direction with the EBL rotary control. The azimuth of
the index lines appear at the left bottom of the screen.
-1.38-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting index line intervals
1. Press the RADAR MENU and [0] key to show the FUNCTIONS 2 menu.
[FUNCTIONS 2]
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK(GRN CHAR)/
BLK(RED CHAR)/
BLU (ECHO AREA)
BLU/
BRT BLU
3 ECHO STRETCH
4 ECHO AVERAGE
5 ECHO COLOR
6 SHIP SPEED
OFF/1/2/3
OFF/1/2/3
YEL/GRN/COLOR*
LOG/NAV*/MAN
MAN = xx.xxKT
(STW/SOG)
7 SET, DRIFT
OFF/MAN
SET = xxx.x°
DRIFT = xx.xKT
NO. 2 VRM/MAN
MAN = xx.xx NM
8 INDEX LINES
9 BRILLIANCE (1)
0 [FUNCTION 3]
*: R-type only
2. Press the [8] key to select menu item 8 INDEX LINES.
3. Press the [8] key to select (or highlight) No. 2 VRM or MAN (manual) option.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection.
5. If you have selected MAN in step 3 above, "MAN = XX.XX NM" appears at the bottom of
the FUNCTIONS 2 menu. Enter a desired line interval by hitting numeric keys followed by
the ENTER key without omitting leading zeroes, if any. There are choices of 2, 3 and 6
index lines but the number of lines visible on the screen may be less than 6 depending on
the line intervals.
6. If you have selected NO. 2 VRM in step 3 above, make sure that the No. 2 VRM is active
and adjust the spacing between the index lines by operating the VRM control.
7. Press the RADAR MENU key to close the FUNCTIONS 2 menu.
To erase the index lines;
1. Press the RADAR MENU key and the [4] key.
2. Press the RADAR MENU key.
-1.39-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.28 Origin Mark
You can mark any reference points, prominent target or a point of particular interest using the
origin mark feature. These marks (max 10) are geographically fixed, i.e., ground stabilized.
To display the origin marks, heading signal and own ship position data are required.
To use the origin mark:
1. Place the cursor (+) at a point where you want to place a reference mark by operating the
trackball.
2. Press the RADAR MENU to show the FUNCTION 1 menu.
3. Press [3] key. The origin mark appears at the cursor position of which range and bearing
are indicated at the lower-right section of the screen.
4. To measure the range and bearing to a target of interest from the origin mark, move the
cursor to the target of interest. Then, the range and bearing from the origin mark to the
target are shown at the target data display.
5. To enter another origin mark, press the ENTER key and the [3] key in the FUNCTIONS 1
menu. Place the cursor where you want to place the origin mark, then press the [3] key.
6. To erase the origin mark, select the mark number in the FUNCTIONS 1 menu by pressing
the ENTER key and the [3] key repeatedly, and then press the [3] key once again.
000
350
010
020
340
EPA
330
030
REL VECTOR 6MIN WT
320
040
RNG 3.4NM
310
300
290
280
050
060
070
080
1
BRG 25.5°T
CSE 264.0°T
SPD 12.3KT
CPA 2.9NM TCPA ***MIN
BCR 2.9NM BCT 20MIN
2
1
RNG 3.2NM
2
BRG 45.0°T
CSE 242°T
090
100
270
260
CPA 0.2NM TCPA ***MIN
BCR **NM BCT **MIN
Origin
mark
250
240
110
120
130
WPT 2
01
150.8NM
155.0°T
230
3.1NM
123.5°T
+
140
220
210
150
200
160
190
170
180
• Origin marks may be affixed with ID numbers or symbols corresponding to the keys in use.
1 Press the RADAR menu key and [0] [0] [2] [0] and [0] keys to show the RADAR 3 menu.
2 Press the [5] key twice to select the number or symbol.
3 Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection.
R/N/W versions: Pressing a function key can enter an origin mark.
Note: To enter an origin mark, Gyro and LL are required. If no LL, select DR through the menu.
-1.40-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For easier entry, you can use a FUNCTION key as follows.
1. Assign origin mark to one of the four function keys as described in the paragraph 1.33.
2. Use the trackball to place the cursor (+) where you want to display an origin mark.
3. Press the assigned function key and then press a number key. The origin mark appears with
number.
4. To enter another origin mark, repeat steps 2 and 3.
If you press the number/symbol key for the origin mark which is already displayed, that
origin mark will disappear.
The range and bearing from the last-entered origin mark to the cursor are automatically
displayed in the text data area. To display another origin mark data;
1. Place the cursor on the origin mark whose range and bearing you want to display.
2. Press the function key assigned to origin mark entry twice.
1.29 Zoom
The zoom function is available on the R-type radar only. This enlarges an area of interest as
large as twice the normal viewing.
1. Place the cursor (+) close to the point of interest by operating the trackball.
2. Press the RADAR MENU to show FUNCTION 1 menu.
3. Press [5] key. The area around the cursor and own ship is enlarged twice as large as the
original size and the label ZOOM appears at the lower-left corner of the screen.
4. To cancel zoom, press the [5] key again on the FUNCTIONS 1 menu.
Note: The zoom feature is inoperative when the display is off centered.
+
+
Cursor
Cursor
(a) Cursor placed at
point of interest
(b) Zoom in
(R-type only)
-1.41-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.30 Markers
Heading marker and heading line
The heading marker and the heading line indicate the ship's heading in all presentation modes.
The heading line is a line from the own ship position to the outer edge of the radar display
area and appears at zero degrees on the bearing scale in head-up mode centered; it changes
the orientation depending on the ship orientation in north-up and true motion modes. The
heading marker appears as a small circle on the bearing scale to indicate the heading when the
display is off-centered or is in north-up or TM mode.
Temporarily erasing heading line, video plotter screen (requires RP-26)
To temporarily extinguish the heading line and video plotter screen to look at targets existing
dead ahead of own ship, press the HL OFF key. The heading line reappears when the key is
released. Note that the video plotter screen (requires Video Plotter RP-26) is also temporarily
erased when the HL OFF key is pressed.
R/N/W versions: Pressing HL OFF key outputs + cursor LL ($RATLL) from J450 on the INT
board. OSD and RSD are also output.
North marker
The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up mode, the north marker
moves around the bearing scale in accordance with the compass signal.
Stern marker
The stern marker (a dot-and-dash line) appears opposite to the heading line. This marker can
be displayed provided that STERN MK ON is selected on the RADAR 2 menu.
Own ship symbol
The own ship symbol ( ) can be displayed/erased on the RADAR 2 menu. The symbol is
scaled to indicate the length and beam of the vessel. If the largest dimension of the symbol
gets smaller than 6 mm, the symbol will disappear and own ship will be represented with a
small dot or circle depending on the range in use.
NOTE: Details should be entered during installation.
-1.42-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.31 Menu Keys
Three menu keys are provided on the right hand corner of the control head, RADAR MENU,
PLOT MENU and NAV MENU keys.
RADAR MENU: Permits setting of basic radar parameters.
PLOT MENU: Permits setting of Electronic Plotting Aids (EPA) parameters or the optional
ARPA ARP-26.
NAV MENU: Provides a choice of navigation data for on-screen display. Also selects display
data for the optional Video Plotter.
HL
PANEL
BRILL
MODE
3
AUDIO
OFF
RADAR
MENU
PLOT
MENU
NAV
MENU
OFF
2
1
OFF
VECTOR
5
LOST
CENTER
TARGET
4
6
ACQ
EBL
CHART
ALIGN
MARK
9
OFFSET
TARGET
DATA
7
8
TARGET
TRAILS
CU, TM
RESET
A/C
AUTO
TARGET
CANCEL
CANCEL
0
ENTER
Note: Menu automatically goes off in 30 seconds if you do not press any key.
-1.43-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.32 RADAR 1, 2 and 3 Menu Settings
Press [RADAR MENU] key.
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 TARGET TRAILS
2 TARGET ALARM
3 ORIGIN MARK
4 INDEX LINES
5 ZOOM *
1 or 2
1 to 10
6 PULSE WIDTH
7 INT REJECT
8 ARPA
9 VIDEO PLOT
0 [FUNCTION 2]
*: R-type only
Press [0] key.
[FUNCTIONS 2]
2 Background color - Character color
BLACK ... Green character
BLACK ....Red character
BLUE .....Display area
BLUE
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK(GRN CHAR)/
BLK(RED CHAR)/
BLU (ECHO AREA)
BLU/
BRT BLU
3 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2/3
4 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
BRIGHT BLUE
5 ECHO COLOR
6 SHIP SPEED
YEL/GRN/COLOR*
LOG/NAV*/MAN
MAN = xx.x KT
(STW/SOG)
7 SET, DRIFT
OFF/MAN
SET = xxx.x°
DRIFT = xx.xKT
NO. 2 VRM/MAN
MAN = xx.xx NM
8 INDEX LINES
*: R-type only
9 BRILLIANCE (1)
0 [FUNCTION 3]
Press [0] key.
[FUNCTIONS 3]
1 [FUNCTIONS 2]
2 [RADAR 1]
3 [FUNCTION KEY 1]
4 [FUNCTION KEY 2]
5 [FUNCTION KEY 3]
6 [FUNCTION KEY 4]
7 RADAR*
7 RADAR: Select 1 for single radar installation or for connecting
to antenna NO. 1 on dual radar installation. , 2 for connecting to
antenna NO. 2 on dual radar installation.
1/2
8
9 GYRO SETTING
0 [FUNCTIONS 4]
Press [2] key.
EBL = xx.x°
-1.44-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[RADAR 1]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
2 EBL 1 *
REL/TRUE
3 EBL 2 *
REL/TRUE
NM/KM
NM/KM
REL/TRUE
SGL/MULT
4 VRM 1 *1
5 VRM 2 *1
6 TRAIL
7 TRAIL
8 [PULSE WD 1]
9 [PULSE WD 2]
0 [RADAR 2]
Press [0] key.
[RADAR 2]
1 [RADAR 1]
2 + CURSOR EBL
3 NOISE REJ
4 STERN MK*
5 SHIP MK
REL/TRUE
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
6 ALARM*
7 KEY BEEP*
8 AUDIO ALARM
9 2ND ECHO REJ
0 [RADAR 3]
OFF/L/M/H
OFF/L/M/H
OFF/ON
8 AUDIO ALARM level : 65/70/80 dB (A)
Press [0] key.
[RADAR 3]
1 [RADAR 2]
2 BARGE MK *2
3 BARGE SIZE *2
OFF/ON
LENGTH=XXX ft
WIDTH = xx ft
4 [BARGE INFORMATION ] *2
5 ORIGIN MK DISP
6 ORIGIN MK STAB
No./SYMBOL
GND/SEA
7 ANTENNA REVOLUTION
LOW/HIGH
1/2
MAN/AUTO
8 RADAR NO.*
9 TUNE
0 TUNE INITIALIZE
*: R-type only
*1: Fishing mode only (one type of R-type)
*2: SM only (one type of R-type)
-1.45-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.33 Function Keys
The four function keys (#1-4) on the control head serve for a macro function to instantly
select a combination of assigned functions or settings. The function keys provide optimum
radar settings for a specific purpose with a single key operation.
Each function key can be assigned a combination of particular radar settings that will be most
suited to your specific navigating purpose, and an adhesive label (such as BUOY, HARBOR,
COAST or the like) is usually attached to the key top for easy identification of the assigned
purpose.
The individual function keys are preset, or programmed, for the following purposes by
qualified service personnel at the time of installation using the procedures described in the
succeeding paragraphs:
Function keys #1, #2 and #3: Picture setup and specific operation
Function key #4: Specific operation or watch alarm
POWER
BRILLIANCE
A/C RAIN
A/C SEA
GAIN
ON
PM
ANTENNA
#1
#3
#2
STBY
TX
OFF
ON
TUNE
EBL
RANGE
#4
DEGAUSS ERR
FUNCTION KEYS
#1: SET-UP 1
#2: SET-UP 2
#3: SET-UP 3
#4: SET-UP 4
1.33.1 Picture setup
Suppose that you have been navigating along a coast for hours and now you are approaching
a harbor, your final destination. You will have to adjust your radar to change from the settings
for coastal navigation to those for harbor approach. Every time your navigating environment
or task changes, you must adjust the radar, which can be a nuisance in a busy situation.
Instead of changing radar settings case by case, it is possible to assign the function keys to
provide optimum settings for often encountered situations.
The radar's internal computer offers several picture setup options to be assigned to each
function key for your specific navigating requirements. For instance, one of the function keys
may be assigned the buoy detecting function and labeled BUOY on the key top. If you press
this key, the radar will be instantly set for optimum detection of navigation buoys and similar
objects and the label BUOY is shown at the left margin of the screen. If you re-press the same
key, the radar returns to the previous settings.
-1.46-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The picture setup options assignable to any of the function keys are shown in the table below:
LABEL
BUOY
DESCRIPTION
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Optimum setting for detecting
vessels
Optimum setting for detecting SHIP
navigation buoys, small vessels
and other small surface objects
Optimum setting for short range LONG
detection using a range scale of
3 nm or less on calm seas
SHORT
Optimum setting for long range
detection using a range scale of
6 nm or larger
CRUISING For cruising using a range scale HARBOR Optimum setting for short range
of 1.5 nm or larger
navigation in a harbor area
using a range scale of 1.5 nm or
less
COAST
For coastal navigation using a SEA
range of 12 nm or less
Transoceanic voyage using a
range scale of 12 nm or larger
Optimum setting for navigation
on a river
ROUGH
SEA
Optimum setting for rough
weather or heavy rain
RIVER
Each picture setup option defines a combination of several radar settings for achieving
optimum setup for a particular navigating situation. Those involved are interference rejector,
echo stretch, echo average, automatic anti-clutter, pulselength and noise rejector settings.
Adjusting these features on a function key menu changes the original function key settings.
To restore the original settings for a particular function key, it is necessary to display the
relevant function key menu and select appropriate menu options.
Note: Function key presetting requires a good knowledge of optimum radar settings. If you
want to change the original function key settings, consult your nearest FURUNO
representative or dealer.
1.33.2 Specific operation
Most often used controls are placed on the center panel while less often used controls are
provided in the menu. To avoid opening the menus to set up the radar for a particular
situation, function keys #1, #2, #3 and #4 may be assigned a combination of the following
settings at the time of installation.
- Target trails (See paragraph 1.25.)
- Echo stretch 1,2 or 3 (See paragraph 1.22.)
- Pulselength 1 or 2 (See paragraph 1.11.)
- Echo averaging 1, 2 or 3 (See paragraph 1 .23.)
- Echo color (See paragraph 1.32.)
- Panel illumination
- Marks brilliance
- Noise rejection
Provided that the function key is assigned the specific operation feature, press the key to instantly
set the radar for the preset purpose. The corresponding label will be displayed at the left margin of
the screen. If you re-press the function key, the radar returns to the previous settings.
-1.47-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.33.3 Watch alarm
The watch alarm sounds an external buzzer at selected time intervals to help you keep regular
watch of the radar picture for safety or other purposes. This feature can be assigned to
function key #4 with a choice of alarm intervals of 6, 10, 12, 15 and 20 minutes. (See the
flowchart for keystroke sequence.)
Provided that function key #4 is assigned the watch alarm feature, just press function key #4
to activate the feature. The label WATCH appears at the lower-left corner of the screen
associated with a watch alarm timer counts down from the initial value (e.g., "12:00").
When a preset time interval has elapsed, an audible watch alarm is released and the screen
label WATCH turns red and the watch alarm timer freezes at "0:00."
To silence the alarm, press the AUDIO key. The label WATCH turns to normal color and the
watch alarm timer is reset to the initial value and starts the count-down sequence again.
If you press the AUDIO OFF key before the selected time interval is reached, the watch alarm
timer is reset to the initial value and starts the count-down sequence again.
-1.48-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.33.4 Setting for function keys #1/#2/#3
[FUNCTION KEY 1]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
(PICT)
RADAR MENU
2 FUNCTION KEY 1
3 PICTURE
PICTURE/OPERATION
FUNC1/BUOY/SHIP/
SHORT/LONG/CRUISING/
HARBOR/COAST/SEA/
ROUGH SEA/RIVER*2/BIRD*1
OFF/1/2/3
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 TARGET TRAILS
2 TARGET ALARM
3 ORIGIN MARK
4 INDEX LINES
5 ZOOM *
1 or 2
1 to 10
4 INT REJECT
5 ECHO STRETCH
6 ECHO AVERAGE
7 A/C AUTO
OFF/1/2/3
OFF/1/2/3
OFF/ON
6 PULSE WIDTH
7 INT REJECT
8 ARPA
8 [FUNC 1 PULSE WD]
9 NOISE REJECT
0 VIDEO CONTRAST 1/2/3
OFF/ON
9 VIDEO PLOT
0 [FUNCTIONS 2]
[8]
[0]
[FUNC 1 PULSE WD]
S1/S2
1 [FUNCTION KEY 1]
2 0.5 NM
[FUNCTIONS 2]
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK (GRN CHAR)/
3 0.75 NM S1/S2/M1
S/M1
S/M1
4 1.5 NM
5 3 NM
6 6 NM
S1/S2/M1
S2/M1/M2/M3 S/M1/M2
M1/M2/M3/L M1/M2/L
BLK (RED CHAR)/
BLU (ECHO AREA)
BLU/
7 12-24 NM M2/M3/L
M2/M3/L
(In the case of FR-2115/2125)
BRT BLU
3 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2/3
4 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
[3]
5 ECHO COLOR
6 SHIP SPEED
YEL/GRN/COLOR*
LOG/NAV*/MAN
MAN = xx.xKT
(STW/SOG)
[2] [2] to toggle between
OPERATION and PICTURE menu.
7 SET, DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET = xxx.x°
DRIFT = xx.xKT
NO.2 VRM/MAN
MAN = xx.xx NM
8 INDEX LINES
[FUNCTION KEY 1]
(OPR)
9 BRILLIANCE (1)
0 [FUNCTIONS 3]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
2 FUNCTION KEY 1
3 OPERATION
PICTURE/OPERATION
TARGET TRAILS/
[0]
TARGET ALALRM/ARPA/VECTOR TIME *
VIDEO PLOT/ZOOM *
BKGD COLOR/INDEX LINES/
INT REJECT/2ND ECHO/ORIGIN MARK/
PLS WD 1/PLS WD 2/
[FUNCTIONS 3]
1 [FUNCTIONS 2]
2 RADAR 1
ECHO STRETCH 1/2/3
ECHO AVG 1/2/3
ECHO COLOR/
CHAR BRILL/MARK BRILL/
TRAIL BRILL/RINGS BRILL/
EBL BRILL/VRM BRILL/
+CURSOR BRILL/HL BRILL/
PLOT BRLL/L/L BRILL/
3 [FUNCTION KEY 1]
4 [FUNCTION KEY 2]
5 [FUNCTION KEY 3]
6 [FUNCTION KEY 4]
[4]
7 RADAR*
1/2
8 INTER SWITCH
9 GYRO SETTING
EBL = xxx.x°
CHART BRILL/NOISE REJECT/
BARGE INFORATION*2
0 [FUNCTIONS 4]
*: R-type only
*1: Fishing mode only (one type of R-type)
*2: SM only (one type of R-type)
-1.49-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Picture setup default for Function Keys 1, 2 and 3
4. INT
Reject
5. ES
6. ES
7. A/C 9. Noise P/L on P/L on P/L on P/L on 3 P/L on P/L on
Auto
Rejector 0.5 nm 0.75 nm 1.5 nm nm
65 nm 12-24
nm
RIVER
BUOY
SHIP
2
3
3
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
OFF
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
S1
S1
S1
S1
S2
S2
S1
S1
S1
S1
S1
S1
S2
S2
S1
S2
S2
S1
S1
S2
S1
S2
S1
M1
M1
S1
M1
M1
S1
S2
M1
S2
M1
S2
M2
M2
S2
M2
M2
S2
M2
M2
M2
M2
M1
M3
M3
M1
M3
M3
M1
M2
M3
M3
M3
M2
L
2
2
3
ON
L
SHORT
LONG
CRUISING
HARBOR
COAST
SEA
OFF
2
OFF
3
OFF
ON
M2
L
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
3
ON
L
OFF
OFF
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
M2
L
L
BIRD
3
L
ROUGH
SEA
2
L
-1.50-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.33.5 Setting for function key #4
RADAR MENU
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 TARGET TRAILS
2 TARGET ALARM
3 ORIGIN MARK
4 INDEX LINES
5 ZOOM *
1 or 2
1 to 10
6 PULSE WIDTH
7 INT REJECT
8 ARPA
9 VIDEO PLOT
0 [FUNCTIONS 2]
[0]
[FUNCTIONS 2]
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK (GRN CHAR)/
[FUNCTION KEY 4]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
2 FUNCTION KEY 4 OPERATION/WATCH ALARM
3 OPERATION TARGET TRAILS/
TARGET ALARM/ARPA/VECTOR TIME *
VIDEO PLOT/ZOOM*
BKGD COLOR/INDEX LINES/
INT REJECT/2ND ECHO/ORIGIN MARK/
PLS WD1/PLS WD 2/
(OPR)
BLK (RED CHAR)/
BLU (ECHO AREA)
BLU/
BRT BLU
3 ECHO STRETCH
OFF/1/2/3
ECHO STRETCH 1/ 2/ 3
4 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
ECHO AVG 1/ 2 / 3
ECHO COLOR/
5 ECHO COLOR
6 SHIP SPEED
YEL/GRN/COLOR*
LOG/NAV*/MAN
MAN = xx.xKT
(STW/SOG)
CHAR BRILL/MARK BRILL/
TRAIL BRILL/RINGS BRILL/
EBL BRILL/VRM BRILL/
+CURSOR BRILL/HL BRILL/
PLOT BRILL/L/L BRILL
7 SET, DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET = xxx.x°
DRIFT=xx.xKT
NO.2 VRM/MAN
MAN = xx.xx NM
CHART BRILL/ NOISE REJECT/
BARGE INFORMATION*2
8 IDX LINES
9 BRILLIANCE (1)
0 [FUNCTIONS 3]
Press [2] once or twice to toggle
between OPERATION and WATCH
ALARM followed by ENTER key.
[0]
[6]
[FUNCTIONS 3]
1 [FUNCTIONS 2]
2 [RADAR 1]
3 [FUNCTION KEY 1]
4 [FUNCTION KEY 2]
5 [FUNCTION KEY 3]
6 [FUNCTION KEY 4]
[FUNCTION KEY 4]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
2 FUNCTION KEY 4 OPERATION/WATCH ALARM
3 WATCH ALARM INTERVAL
(WATCH ALARM)
[6]
7 RADAR*
1/2
8
6/10/12/15/20 MIN
9 GYRO SETTING
EBL = xxx.x°
0 [FUNCTIONS 4]
*: R-type only
*1: Fishing mode only (one type of R-type)
*2: SM only (one type of R-type)
-1.51-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.34 Barge information
Do the following to display the barge information. This function is not available in all radar.
1. Press the RADAR MENU, [0],[0],[2],[0] and [0] to reach the RADAR 3 menu.
2. Press [2] key twice to select BARGE MK ON, followed by the ENTER key.
3. Press [3] key to select BARGE SIZE and enter length and width of a barge, followed by the ENTER
key.
4. Press [4] key to display BARGE INFORMATION menu.
5. Enter number of barges in first row, followed by the ENTER key.
6. Enter the number of barges for 2nd, 3rd, 4th and/or 5th row followed by the ENTER key. The barge
information appears on the radar display.
1.35 Radar Map
A radar map is a combination of map lines and symbols whereby the user can define and
input the navigation, route planning and monitoring data on the radar equipment. Map lines
are navigational facility whereby the observer can define lines to indicate channels or traffic
separation schemes. Also called nav lines, these lines can be ground stabilized to stop them
drifting. (Definition in Annex C of IEC 60936-1 and IEC 60872-1)
In this series of radar, a radar map may contain 150 points of mark and line data on one map.
10 maps can the memorized to facilitate the repeated use on the routine navigation area.
The user can create a radar map on-real time base while using the radar for navigation or at
leisure time at anchor or while the radar is not being used. Place of a map can be made for
any waterways apart from the actual own ship location. The map data is stored on EEROM
card which is mounted on the main processor board socket. When the optional Video Plotter
board RP-26 and RAM card are installed in the display unit, much more data can be created
and copied to another card.
General operation procedure:
1. Press the NAV MENU key to show the NAV INFORMATION 1 menu.
2. Press [2] key to select the SELECT NAVAID operation.
3. Press [2] key again to select navigation data input device, followed by the ENTER key.
4. Also, set other nav data parameters as appropriate referring to the operation flow shown on
the next page.
5. Press the NAV MENU key to close the NAV INFORMATION menu.
-1.52-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
1) Own ship position display requires an input from radionavigational equipment such as a
GPS receiver in accordance with the data format as defined by IEC 61162-1.
2) Wind, water current, depth, water temperature are not displayed when relevant sensors are
not fitted and the text are for these is used for displaying another target data.
1.35.1 Making a radar map
1. Press the NAV MENU key to display the NAV INFORMATION 1 menu.
2. Press [1] key to display the RADAR MAP menu.
3. Press the [2] key twice to set MAP ON, then press the ENTER key.
4. Press the [8] key to select the MAP DISP SELECT menu.
[MAP DISP SELECT]
1 [RADAR MAP]
2 DANGER HIGHLIGHT
3 COAST LINE
4 MARK
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
5 NAV LINE
6 PROHIBITED AREAS
7 BUOY
8 CONTOUR LINE
9 WPT MARK
5. Press appropriate numeric key twice to select ON, then press the ENTER key.
6. Press the NAV MENU key to close the menu.
Mark entry mode
Marks can be entered in 3 different ways.
1. Press the NAV MENU to display the NAV INFORMATION 1 menu.
2. Press [1] key to display the RADAR MAP menu.
3. Press [6] key and further press [6] key to select the entry mode - cursor, L/L or own ship
position.
4. Press the ENTER key followed by the NAV MENU key.
5. Press the MARK key to read the following legends.
-1.53-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xx xx. xxx N/S
*
xxx xx. xxx E/W
MARK XX
21 LINE CHANGE
22 MARK CANCEL
CANCEL ENTER MARK CANCEL KEY
*: These appear when L/L mode is selected at the step 3.
6. Select a wanted position, followed by the ENTER key. Positions can be selected either by
the Trackball, lat/lon values or at own ship.
7. Select a desired mark by the corresponding number followed by the ENTER key.
8. Repeat steps 6-7. To enter the same mark selected, simply repeat step 6.
9. To erase a mark entered, enter 22, place the cursor to the mark you want to erase and then
press the CANCEL key.
10. To escape the mark entry mode press the CANCEL key.
Example: How to draw a coastline
1. Press the MARK key.
2. Enter 17 to select Coast Line and press the ENTER key.
3. Place the cursor mark on a required position and press the ENTER key.
4. Place the cursor at a next position and press the ENTER key. One line appears connecting
designated two points.
5. Repeat step 4 to establish the coastline.
6. To enter more than one of the same type of line, after entering one line, enter 21 and press
the ENTER key. Then, repeat step 2 to 5.
7.To draw other lines, enter required line no., for example, enter 18 to inscribe a contour line,
followed by the ENTER key. Repeat step 3.
8. To erase a line segment entered, enter 22, place the cursor to a point and then press the
CANCEL key. For example, if point 4 is erased on the figure below, line segment 3-4 is
erased. If point 3 is erased, line segments 2-3 and 3-4 are erased and new line segment 2-4
is generated.
2
4
3
1
-1.54-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.35.2 Storing the map data
When you have made a map, store it with a map number as follows:
1. Press the NAV MENU and [1] key to display RADAR MAP menu.
2. Press [7] key for ENTER MAP menu.
3. Press [2] key and enter map number by numeral key, followed by ENTER key.
4. Press the NAV MENU key to leave this menu.
1.35.3 Displaying radar map
1. Press the NAV MENU and [1] key in order to display the RADAR MAP.
2. Press [3] key and enter a map number you want to display.
3. Press ENTER key.
North marker
000
010
350
020
Separation zone
340
Heading marker
330
030
320
040
Waypoint
310
050
Navline
Target being tracked
W012
060 Own ship safe contour
300
290
280
070
Heading line
080
Planned route
090
270
260
100
Own ship vector
250
110
240
120
Approximate coastline
W011
230
130
140
220
Dangerous side of own
ship safe contour may be
marked like this.
Waypoint
210
150
200
160
190
170
180
Past position
ARPA: Equally time-spaced positions of any targets being tracked.
Note-not equally geographically spaced.
EPA: Past plot positions may not be equally time-spaced, up to the
operator.
Concept of Radar map, Ground stabilized
(Above excludes radar pictures. In reality, radar echoes are always displayed)
4. Press [1] and [7] key in order to display the NAV LINE menu.
5. Press [4] key twice to select NAV WIDTH ON and enter navigation width in nautical mile.
6. Press the ENTER key followed by the NAV MENU key.
-1.55-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.35.4 Erasing contents of a radar map
1. Press the NAV MENU, [1] and [9] key to display MAP ERASE menu.
2. Press a wanted number key twice to select OFF or ALL, followed by the ENTER key.
[MAP ERASE]
1 [RADAR MAP]
2 DANGER HIGHLIGHT
3 COAST LINE
4 MARK
5 NAV LINE
6 PROHIBITED AREAS
7 BUOY
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
8 CONTOUR LINE
9 WPT MARK
3. Press the NAV MENU key to leave the menu.
Press [NAV MENU\] key.
[RADAR MAP]
1 [NAV INFOMATION 1]
2 MAP OFF/ON
3 MAP NO. MAP xx
[NAV INFOMATION 1]
1 [RADAR MAP]
2 SELECT NAVAID GPS+LC/DEAD RECKONING
[ENTER MAP]
1 [RADAR MAP]
2 ENTEA MAP MAP xx
MAP LIST xx xx
xx xx xx xx
xx xx xx xx
4 NAV DATA POSN
3 OWN SHIP POSN OFF L/L
4 POSN xx° xx.xxx
N/S
5 ALIGN +CURSOR DATA OFF/ON
6 MARK ENTRY MODE CURSOR/ L/L /OWN SHIP POSN
7 [ENTER MAP]
8 [MAP DISP SELECT]
9 [MAP ERASE]
9 ERASE MAP MAP xx
xxx° xx.xxx
E/W
5 +CURSOR DATA OFF/ L/L
6 WPT DATA OFF/REL/TRUE
7 [NAV LINE]
8 [WAY POINT]
9 WIND DATA OFF/ ON
0 [NAV INFOMATION 2]
[MAP DISP SELECT]
1 [RADAR MAP]
2 DANGER HIGHLIGHT OFF/ON
[NAV LINE]
1 [NAV INFOMATION 1]
2 NAV LINE
3
4 NAV WIDTH
3 COAST LINE
4 MARK
5 NAV LINE
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
x.xxNM
6 PROHIBITED AREAS OFF/ON
[NAV INFOMATION 2]
7 BUOY
8 CONTOUR LINE
9
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
1 [NAV INFOMATION 1]
2 WIND GRAPH OFF/ON
3 WIND UNIT m/s /KT
4 CURRENT DATA OFF/ON
5 CURRENT GRAPH OFF/ON
6 DEPTH DATA OFF/ON
7 DEPTH GRATH OFF/ON
8 DEPTH SCALE 10/20/50/100/
200/500
5 WPT NO.
OFF/ON
6
7
8 ARRLVAL ALARM
OFF/ON
x.xxNM
OFF/ON/REVISED
[MAP ERASE]
1 [RADAR MAP]
2 DANGER HIGHLIGHT OFF/ALL
9 TURNING LINE
3 COAST LINE
4 MARK
5 NAV LINE
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
9 DEPTH UNIT *1 m/ft
0 [NAV INFOMATION 3]
6 PROHIBITED AREAS OFF/ALL
7 BUOY
8 CONTOUR LINE
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
[WAY POINT]
1 [NAV INFOMATION 1]
[NAV INFOMATION 3]
1 [NAV INFOMATION 2]
2 WATER TEMPERATUDE *1 OFF/ON
3 DATE OFF/UTC/LOCAL +00:00H
4 USED WPL*
2 WPT MARK
3
4 WPT LINE
5 WPT NO.
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
NAV LINE/WP
6
7
8 ARRIVAL ALARM
OFF/ON
x.xxNM
*: R-type only
*1: Fishing mode only (one type of R-type)
-1.56-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.36 Suppressing Second-trace Echoes
In certain situations, echoes from very distant targets may appear as false echoes
(second-trace echoes) on the screen. This occurs when the return echo is received one
transmission cycle later, that is, after a next radar pulse has been transmitted.
To activate or deactivate the second-trace echo rejector:
1. Press the RADAR MENU, [0], [0], [2] and [0] key to show the RADAR 2 menu.
2. Press the [9] key to select menu item 2ND ECHO REJ option.
3. Further press the [9] key to activate (ON) or deactivate (OFF) the second-trace echo
rejector.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude selection followed by the RADAR MENU key to
close the RADAR menu.
1.37 Displaying External Waypoint and Navigation Line
Waypoint or navigation line defined on another navaid can be displayed by setting
WAYPOINT and NAV LINE menu as follows. To display the menu, press the NAV MENU
and [8], [2] for waypoint or [7], [2] for navigation line if video plotter is not provided.
[WAYPOINT]
1 [NAV INFORMATION 1]
[NAV LINE]
2 WPT MARK
3 WPT
OFF/ON
1 [NAV INFORMATION]
2 NAV LINE
3
OFF/ON
4 NAV WIDTH
OFF/ON
x.xxxNM
OFF/ON
5 WPT NO.
6
4 WPT LINE
5 WPT NO.
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
6
7
7
8 ARRIVAL ALARM
OFF/ALL
x.xxNM
OFF/ON/REVISED
8 ARRIVAL ALARM
OFF/ON
x.xxNM
9 TURNING LINE
Cross track error correction at
turning line
No cross track error correction
at turning line
Navigation
line
Course
Turning line
Turning
line
Own ship
Track
TURNING LINE: ON
TURNING LINE: REVISED
-1.57-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.38 Adjusting Brilliance of Screen Data
You can adjust relative brilliance levels of various marks and alphanumeric readouts displayed on
the screen by the steps below:
1. Press the RADAR MENU key to show the FUNCTIONS 1 menu.
2. Press the [0] and [9] key to show the BRILLIANCE 1 menu. To display the BRILLIANCE 2
menu, further press the [9] key.
3. Select a desired menu item by pressing the corresponding numeric key. As an example, press
[8] in the BRILLIANCE menu if you want to change the brilliance of target trails.
4. Further press the same numeric key as you pressed in step 3 above to select or highlight a
desired brilliance level.
5. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection followed by the RADAR MENU key to
close the FUNCTIONS menu.
RADAR MENU
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 TARGET TRAILS
2 TARGET ALARM
3 ORIGIN MARK
4 INDEX LINES
5
1 or 2
1 to 10
6 PULSE WIDTH
7 INT REJECT
8 ARPA
9 VIDEO PLOT
0 [FUNCTIONS 2]
[0]
[9]
[FUNCTIONS 2]
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK (GRN CHAR)/
[BRILLIANCE 1]
1 [FUNCTIONS 2]
2 RINGS BRILL
3 EBL BRILL
4 VRM BRILL
OFF/DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
BLK (RED CHAR)/
BLU (ECHO AREA)
BLU/
5 +CURSOR BRILL OFF/DIM/M1/M2/BRT
6 CHAR BRILL
7 MARK BRIL
8 TRAIL BRILL
9 HL BRILL
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M/BRT
BRT BLU
3 ECHO STRETCH
OFF/1/2/3
4 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
5 ECHO COLOR
6 SHIP SPEED
YEL/GRN/COLOR*
0 [BRILLIANCE 2]
LOG/NAV*/MAN
MAN = xx.xKT
(STW/SOG)
[0]
[BRILLIANCE 2]
7 SET, DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET = xxx.x°
1 [BRILLIANCE 1]
2 PLOT BRILL
3 L/L GRID BRILL
4 CHART BRILL
DRIFT=xx.xKT
NO.2 VRM/MAN
MAN = xx.xx NM
OFF/DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
8 INDEX LINES
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
9 BRILLIANCE (1)
0 [FUNCTIONS 3]
5 SYMBOLS BRILL DIM/M1/M2/BRT
-1.58-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The table below describes which menu item adjusts the brilliance of which picture element.
Menu Item
RINGS
VRM
Functions adjusted
Fixed range rings
Menu Item
EBL
Functions adjusted
Electronic bearing lines NO. 1, 2
Variable range markers NO. 1, 2
Alphanumeric readouts
Target trails
+ CURSOR Trackball controlled cursor
CHAR
MARKS
HL
Bearing scale
TRAILS
PLOT
Heading Line and stern marker
Latitude and longitude grid lines
Plots for EPA and ARP-26
Charts
L/L
CHART
Note: You should adjust the entire CRT brilliance by operating the BRILLIANCE control
before adjusting the respective brilliance levels on the BRILLIANCE 1 and 2 menu.
1.39 Display of Wind/Tide/Depth Information
Wind
Wind, oceancurrent and depth sounding data can be displayed in the text cell which is
normally used to indicate third target ship data. Do as below:
1. Press the NAV menu to show the NAV INFORMATION 1 menu.
2. Press [9] key twice to set WIND DATA ON and press the ENTER key.
3. Press [0] key to show NAV INFORMATION 2 menu.
4. Press [2] key twice to set WIND GRAPH ON and press the ENTER key.
Echo sounding depth and tide
1. Do the same to indicate ocean current graph and echo-sounding chart. Depth scales can be
selected among 10, 20, 50, 100, 200 and 500 m. The echogram shows the last 30 minutes
of depths along the ship’s track.
2. Press [0] key to show the NAV INFORMATION menu.
3. To indicate the date and time in UTC, press [3] key twice or three times to select UTC and
press ENTER key.
4. To indicate the local time, press [3] key twice or three times and press ENTER key twice.
Enter time difference between UTC and local time, followed by the ENTER key.
Note: Wind data and current data require the respective sensors. The depth data requires an
adequate echo-sounding equipment. The echogram shows the last 30 minutes of depths
along the ship’s track. Wind vector shows a direction from which the wind blows in,
relative to own ship heading, and labeled T *. Wind velocity is a true wind speed as a
result of compensating for own ship’s speed and orientation. Ocean current (tide) is the
direction to which the current is flowing away from os position, relative to north.
* T in this case means a true value meanwhile T denotes “relative to True North” in the
case of EBLs and target ship vectors.
-1.59-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OS heading
N
E
Current relative to north,
full scale 10 kt
Wind direction relative to OS heading, full
scale 100 kt. Wind velocity is calculated
value to exclude the ship's orientation
and speed
W
S
Example of Head-up mode
0
Present depth
20
40
60
Last 30 minutes
of depth
80
100 m
30
20
10 min
-1.60-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.40 Alarms
The table below summarizes alarms which may occur at various warning conditions.
Warming
Audible alarm
2 beeps
Visual alarm
To quit alarm status
Match the on-screen HDG
readout with the actual compass
reading, if necessary. Then, press
the Cancel key to erase the
message SET HEADING.
GYRO failure
HDG label reads “***.*” and the
message SET HDG appears at
the lower-left corner of the
screen. GYRZO in red.
Display is automatically switched
to head-up mode within 1 min
(IEC 60936-1/3.12.2.1).
Target alarm
(TAZ)
beeps
beeps
Target flashes.
Press [2] key on Function 1 menu
(Section 1.20).
WATCH alarm
WATCH 0:00
Press the AUDIO OFF key. The
label WATCH turns to normal
video and the timer is reset
(Section 1.32.3).
(Label WATCH turns red and time
count freezes at 0:00).
Own ship lat/lon none
Cursor lat/lon
“***.*” In own ship position field
“***.*” In cursor position field
Make sure that own ship position
data is fed from external radionav
equipment.
System failure
none
Message BRG SIGNAL MISSING Make sure the antenna switch in
at screen bottom. No radar
echoes. SYSTEM FAILURE in
red at the lower left of the display
during test.
the tuning compartment is on.
Incorrect
keystroke
double beep
tone
none
Correct keystroke is responded by
a single beep provided that KEY
BEEP ON is selected in initial
settings.
Log failure
2 beeps
LOG **.* and LOG appears in red, If the SDME has failed, use the
if no log signal is input for 30 s
while the ship speed has been
more than 5.0 kt .
Manual Speed mode or other
appropriate sensor.
EPFS failure
Continuous
beep
EPFS in red (EPFS: electronic
position-fixing system) in the
warning and indication cell.
To silence the beep, press the
AUDIO OFF key.
Press the CANCEL key to erase
The indication also appears when message which appears when
the GPS mode is switched
between GPS and DGPS.
GPS mode is switched. Message
cannot be erased if position signal
is missing; it is automatically
erased when signal is restored.
-1.61-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOG indication
COLLISION
none
The label SOG (Speed Made
Good) turns red at the top data
cell when SOG option is selected data even if the SDME regains a
on the menu and the assoclated
SDME (Speed and Distance
Measuring Equipment = Speed
log) fails to detect a bottom
tracking speed, resulting in the
"Speed through the water" (STW)
mode automatically.
The radar does not automatically
reset itself to receive an SOG
bottom tracking speed. To erase
SOG indication (red), press keys
[RADAR menu], [0], [6].
Continuous
beep
TRUE VECTOR none
indication
The label TRUE VECTOR turns
red in the second data cell when
the TRUE Vector is selected in
the RM mode, and returns to the
normal text color in the North-up
TM mode.
UPDATE PLOT
COLLISION
none
If you have failed to enter a next
EPA plot with in 10 min, this
indication flashes. Plot symbol of important.
the target also flashes.
Re-acquire the flashing target
within 5 min. Leave it if it is not
Continuous
beep
COLLISION comes on when
EPA- or ATA-tracked target is on tracking of target.
Take evasive action or terminate
collision course.
Then, visual indication goes off.
Guard Zone
alarm
Continouas
beep
The label CZ appears in red if a
target enters to the guard zone.
Target is masked by a flashing
inverted triangle.
Press the AUDIO OFF key to
acknowledge it.
GZ OUT
alarm
none
If the range scale has been
reduced to make one of GZs
positions more than 1.5 times of
the range scale, the label GZ
OUT appears in red.
CXhange the range scale of GZ.
-1.62-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 OPERATION OF ARPA (Option)
2.1 General
The FR-2105 series radar can accommodate an ARPA (Automatic Radar Plotting Aid)
module ARP-26 complying with IMO A.823 and IEC 60987-1. This chapter describes the
operation of the ARPA. For operation of normal radar, refer to Chapter 1.
Principal specifications
Acquisition and tracking
• Automatic acquisition of up to 20 targets plus manual acquisition of 10 targets, or fully
manual acquisition of 30 targets between 0.2 and 32 nm. Manual acquisition has a priority
over automatic acquisition. Therefore, if 20 targets have been manually acquired, the
capacity for automatic acquisition is 10 targets.
• The ARPA automatically tracks all acquired targets, whether manually or automatically
acquired, between 0.1 and 32 nm (0.1 and 24 nm depending on initial setting). Manually
acquired targets are indicated in bold symbols and the automatically acquired targets, in
thinner symbols.
Vector length: 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 15, 30 min.
Orientation:
True velocity or relative velocity
Stabilization:
Sea or Ground as selected with Vector key.
Motion trend: Displayed within 20 scans, full accuracy within 60 scans after acquisition.
Past positions: Choice of 5, 10 or 20 past positions at intervals of 30 s, 1, 2, 3 or 6 min.
Alarms:
Visual and audible alarms against targets violating CPA/TCPA limits, lost
targets, targets crossing guard zone, system failure and target full status.
Trial maneuver: Predicted situation appears in 1 min after selected delay (1-60 minutes).
-2.1-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 Keypads for ARPA
The ARPA uses the keys on the plotting keyboard on the right side of the radar screen and
two keys on the control head.
PLOT MENU: Shows/hides ARPA menus.
Plot Symbol keys: Select specific plot symbols for
manually acquired targets.
TARGET CANCEL: Terminates tracking of a
single target specified by the trackball if the key is
pressed with a hit-and-release action. If the key is
held depressed for about 3 seconds, tracking of all
targets is terminated.
HL
PANEL
BRILL
MODE
3
AUDIO
OFF
RADAR
MENU
PLOT
MENU
NAV
MENU
OFF
2
1
OFF
CENTER
LOST
TARGET
VECTOR
5
4
6
ACQ
CHART
ALIGN
EBL
7
MARK
9
ENTER: Registers menu options selected.
TARGET
DATA
8
TARGET
TRAILS
CU, TM
RESET
A/C
AUTO
TARGET
CANCEL
VECTOR: Selects true or relative presentation of
target vectors.
CANCEL
0
ENTER
TARGET DATA: Displays data on one of tracked
targets selected by the trackball.
Plotting keypad
LOST TARGET: Silences the lost target aural
alarm and erases the lost target symbol.
ACQ (on control head): Manually acquires a target.
AUDIO OFF (on control head): Silences aural
alarm.
CRITERIA OF TRACKING
A target measuring 800 m or more in the radial or circumferential direction is regarded
as a landmass and not acquired or tracked. Echoes smaller than 800 m are regarded as
targets to be tracked.
-2.2-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 ARPA Menu Operation
To activate ARPA function;
1. Press the RADAR MENU key.
2. Press [8] key to select ARPA, instead of EPA.
Note that the label ARPA appears in the upper-right box on the screen.
Various parameters for the ARPA are set on the ARPA 1 and ARPA 2 menus. To do this,
follow the steps shown below:
1. Press the PLOT MENU key to show the ARPA 1 menu.
2. Press the [0] key once if you wish to go to the ARPA 2 menu.
3. Select a desired menu item by pressing the corresponding numeric key.
4. Select a menu option by pressing the same numeric key as pressed in step 3 above. If there
is more than one option on the current menu item, you may need to press the numeric key
several times. Press it until the desired option is highlighted. (Note that certain menu items
will prompt you to enter numeric data or to define points on the radar screen with the
trackball.)
5. Press the ENTER key to register settings.
6. Press the PLOT MENU key to close the menu.
Press [PLOT MENU] key.
[ARPA 1]
1 VECTOR TIME
2 AUTO ACQ
3 AUTO ACQ AREA
4 GUARD ZONE
5 [GUARD ZONE SET] **]
6 TARGET BASED SPEED
30SEC/1/2/3/6/12/15/30MIN
OFF/ON
3.6NM/[SET] *
OFF/ON
* SET opens the [AUTO ACQ AREA SET]
submenu which reads:
1
2
[ARPA1]
1/2 SET LEFT/RIGHT BOUNDARY
CANCEL PREVIOUS AREA: CANCEL
KEY
7 REFERENCE TARGET VECT OFF/ON
8 COLLISION ALARM
OFF/ON CPA
TCPA xx.xMIN
x.xKT
** This submenu reads:
1
2
[ARPA 1]
9 [TRIAL MANEUVER]
0 [ARPA 2]
1/2 SET LEFT/RIGHT BOUNDARY
CANCEL PREVIOUS AREA: CANCEL
KEY
Press [0].
[ARPA 2]
1 [ARPA 1]
2 TRIAL MODE
3 HISTORY
STATIC/DYNAMIC
OFF/ON
4 HISTORY POINTS
5 HISTORY INTVL
6 MARK SIZE
7 GUARD, ACQ STABILIZE
8 [INPUT SIG CHECK]
9 [ARPA TRACK TEST]
5/10
30SEC/1/2/3/6MIN
STD/LARGE
NORTH/CRT
0 [ARPA INITIAL SETTING]
-2.3-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 Start-up Procedure
Entering own ship's speed
The ARPA requires own ship's speed and heading data. The speed can be entered
automatically from a speed log (SDME, Speed and Distance Measuring Equipment), navaid,
or by referencing to a target-based speed (based on 3 max. stationary objects). Manual input
is also possible.
Automatic speed input
For speed log input:
1. Press the RADAR MENU key and [0] key to show the FUNCTIONS 2 menu.
Press [RADAR MENU] key.
↓
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 TARGET TRAILS
2 TARGET ALARM
3 ORIGIN MARK
4 INDEX LINES
5 ZOOM*
1 or 2
1 to 10
6 PULSE WIDTH
7 INT REJECT
8 ARPA
9 VIDEO PLOT
0 [FUNCTION 2]
↓ Press [0] key.
[FUNCTIONS 2]
2 Background color - Character color
BLACK ... Green character
BLACK ....Red character
BLUE .....Display area
BLUE
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK(GRN CHAR)/
BLK(RED CHAR)/
BLU (ECHO AREA)
BLU/
BRT BLU
BRIGHT BLUE
3 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2/3
4 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
5 TARGETS COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR*
6 SHIP SPEED
7 SET, DRIFT
8 INDEX LINES
LOG/NAV*/MAN
MAN = xx.xKT
(STW/SOG)
OFF/MAN
SET = xxx.x°
DRIFT = xx.xKT
NO. 2 VRM/MAN
MAN = xx.xx NM
9 BRILLIANCE (1)
0 [FUNCTION 3]
* : R-type only
2. Press the [6] key to select menu item SHIP'S SPEED.
3. Press the [6] key to select (or highlight) LOG option.
-2.4-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection followed by the RADAR MENU key to
close the FUNCTIONS 2 menu. The ship's speed readout at the top of the screen shows
own ship's speed fed from the speed log preceded by the label "LOG."
Notes:
1) IMO Resolution A.823(19) for ARPA recommends that a speed log to be interfaced with
an ARPA should be capable of providing through-the-water speed data (forward speed).
2) Be sure not to select LOG when a speed log is not connected. If the log signal is not
provided, the ship speed readout at the top of the screen will be blank. In the event of a log
error, you can continue plotting by entering a manual speed.
3) If a log signal interval becomes more than 30 seconds with the ship's speed 5 kt or more,
the radar regards the speed log is defective and LOG FAIL appears, reading xx.x KT. If no
speed input is present for 3 minutes at below 0.1 kt, the radar regards the log is defective.
Manual speed input
To manually enter the ship's speed with the numeric keys:
1. Press the RADAR MENU key and [0] key to show the FUNCTIONS 2 menu.
2. Press the key [6] to select menu item SHIP'S SPEED.
3. Press the key [6] to select (or highlight) MAN option.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection. At this point, "MAN = xx.x KT" appears
at the bottom of the FUNCTIONS 2 menu.
5. Enter the ship speed by hitting corresponding numeric keys followed by the ENTER key
without omitting leading zeroes, if any. As an example, if the ship speed is 8 knots, press
[0] [8] [ENTER]. For 4.5 knots, [0] [4] [5] [ENTER].
6. Press the RADAR MENU key to close the FUNCTIONS 2 menu. The ship speed readout
at the screen top shows own ship's speed you entered preceded by the label "MENU."
Target-based speed
The use of target-based speed is recommended when:
• The speed log is not operating properly or not connected to the radar.
• The vessel has no device which can measure ship's leeward movement (Doppler sonar,
speed log, etc.) when leeward movement can not be disregarded.
If you select target-based speed, the ARP-26 calculates own ship's speed relative to a fixed
reference target. The number of targets may be 1, 2 or 3. They appear as tracked targets, each
shown in a small circle, but without a vector. When a plural of objects are selected, the mean
value is used for stabilization and speed. Select the number in [PLOT MENU], see section
2.3.
1. Select a small fixed island or any radar prominent point located at 0.2 to 24 nm from own
ship.
2. Place the cursor (+) on the target by operating the trackball.
-2.5-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the PLOT MENU key and [6] key followed by the ENTER key.
The reference target mark (see below) appears at the cursor position and the own ship data
label changes from "LOG," "NAV" or "MENU" to "REF." Note that it takes 60 scans or
approximately 1 min before a new speed is displayed. If tracking has failed for a reference
target, the target is marked with a lost target mark (symbol formed with two triangles).
R
changes to ○R in 60 scans
Notes:
1) When the reference target is lost or goes out of the acquisition range, the reference target
mark blinks and the speed reads "xx.x." Select a different reference target in this case.
2) When all targets are deleted, the reference target mark is also deleted and the target-based
speed becomes invalid. The speed is indicated in KTBT where BT means Bottom Track
(speed over ground).
3) The vector of the reference target can be displayed by menu operation (ARPA 1 menu).
Canceling target-based speed
To cancel the target-based speed, the PLOT MENU and [6] key. The speed is shown by LOG,
NAV* or MANUAL as selected previously.
Deactivating the ARPA
To deactivate the ARPA, press the RADAR MENU key and [8] key twice followed by the
ENTER key. Target plotting symbols and the on-screen label ARPA will disappear. The label
EPA appears.
2.5 Automatic Acquisition
The ARPA can acquire up to 30 targets (20 automatically and 10 manually or all 30 manually).
If AUTO ACQ is selected after more than 20 targets have been manually acquired, only the
remaining capacity of targets can be automatically acquired. For example, when 30 targets
have been acquired manually, then the ARPA is switched to AUTO ACQ. Only 10 targets can
be acquired automatically.
A target just acquired automatically is marked with a broken square and a vector appears
within 20 scans of antenna to indicate the target's motion trend. Within 60 scans, the initial
tracking stage is finished and the target becomes ready for stable tracking. At this point, the
broken square mark changes to a solid circle. (Targets automatically acquired are
distinguished from those acquired manually, the targets which are acquired manually are
displayed by bold symbol.)
-2.6-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enabling and disabling auto acquisition
1. Press the RADAR MENU key and [8] key twice followed by the ENTER and RADAR
MENU key if the ARPA is not yet activated. Note that the label ARPA appears in the box
at the upper-right on the screen.
2. Press the PLOT MENU key to show the ARPA 1 menu.
[ARPA 1]
1 VECTOR TIME
2 AUTO ACQ
30SEC/1/2/3/6/12/15/30MIN
OFF/ON
3 AUTO ACQ AREA
4 GUARD ZONE
3 6/[SET]
OFF/ON
5 [GUARD ZONE SET]
6 TARGET BASED SPEED
7 REFERENCE TARGET VECT OFF/ON
8 COLLISION ALARM
OFF/ON CPA x.xKT
TCPA xx.xMIN*
9 [TRIAL MANEUVER]
0 [ARPA 2]
* Setting range: 1.0 to 99.9 min
3. Press the [2] key to select menu item AUTO ACQ.
4. Further press the [2] key to select (or highlight) ON (enable auto acquisition) or OFF
(disable auto acquisition) as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection followed by the PLOT MENU key to
close the ARPA 1 menu. Note that the label AUTO+MAN is displayed in the box at the
upper-right on the screen when auto acquisition is enabled; MAN when auto acquisition is
disabled.
Note: When the ARPA has acquired 20 targets automatically, the message AUTO TARGET
FULL is displayed in the box at the right-hand side of screen.
Auto acquisition areas
Automatic acquisition is performed within 1 or 2 zones. Outside these zones is auto
acquisition suppressed zones. The zones can be set at 3-3.5 n and/or 5.5-6.0 nm, or anywhere
within 0.2 - 32 nm.
Predefined auto acquisition areas (Menu item: 3 & 6 NM)
1. Press the PLOT MENU key to show the ARPA 1 menu.
2. Press the [3] key to select menu item AUTO ACQ AREA.
3. Further press the [3] key to select (or highlight) menu option 3, 6NM.
4. Press the ENTER key to confirm your selection followed the PLOT MENU key to close
the ARPA 1 menu.
-2.7-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The illustration below shows how the auto acquisition areas are displayed on the screen. Up to
20* targets within the auto acquisition areas are acquired automatically. There is no priority in
picking up. It is recommended to use 2 zones on high speed craft.
* If 30 targets have already been acquired manually in the MAN ACQ mode (AUTO OFF on
ARPA 1 menu), only 10 more targets can be acquired automatically.
5.5-6 nm
3-3.5 nm
Predefined auto acquisition areas
Free selection of acquisition zones (Menu item: SET)
To set auto acquisition areas with trackball:
1. Press the PLOT MENU key to show the ARPA 1 menu.
2. Press the [3] key to select menu item AUTO ACQ AREA.
3. Further press the [3] key to select (or highlight) SET option.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection. At this point the AUTO ACQ SETTING
menu is displayed at the screen bottom.
[AUTO ACQ AREA SET]
1 [ARPA 1]
2 1/2
5. Press the [2] key to select menu item "1/2" and press the ENTER key. Then, you will see
the message as shown below:
[AUTO ACQ SETTING]
1 [ARPA 1]
2 1/2
SET LEFT/RIGHT BOUNDARY
CANCEL PREVIOUS AREA: CANCEL KEY
-2.8-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Place the cursor at the outer counterclockwise corner of the area (point A) and press the
ENTER key.
7. Place the cursor at the clockwise edge of the area (point B) and press the ENTER key.
0.5 nm
A
B
Note: If you wish to create an auto acquisition area having a 360-degree coverage around
own ship, set point B in almost the same direction (approx. ±5°) as point A and press the
ENTER key.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 above if you want to set another auto acquisition area with the trackball.
9. Press the [1] key followed by the PLOT MENU key to close the ARPA 1 menu.
An auto acquisition area like the example shown above appears on the display. Note that each
auto acquisition area has a fixed radial extension (width) of 0.5 nm.
Note that the auto acquisition areas are preserved in an internal memory of the ARPA even
when auto acquisition is disabled or the ARPA is turned off.
Terminating tracking of targets
When the ARPA has acquired 20 targets automatically, the message AUTO TARGET FULL
is displayed in the box at right-hand side of the screen and no more auto acquisition occurs
unless targets are lost. You may find this message before you set an auto acquisition area.
Should this happen, cancel tracking of less important targets or perform manual acquisition.
Canceling individual targets
Place the cursor (+) on a target to cancel tracking by operating the trackball. Press the
TARGET CANCEL key.
Canceling all targets at a time
Press and hold the TARGET CANCEL key down more than 3 seconds. In the automatic
acquisition mode, acquisition begins again.
Discrimination between landmass and true targets
A target is recognized as a landmass and thus not acquired if it is 800 m or more in range or
bearing direction.
-2.9-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 Manual Acquisition
In auto acquisition mode (AUTO ACQ ON), up to 20 targets can be manually acquired in
addition to 20 auto acquired targets. When auto acquisition is disabled (AUTO ACQ OFF), up
to 40 targets can be manually acquired and automatically tracked.
To manually acquire a target:
1. Place the cursor (+) on a target of interest by operating the trackball.
2. Press the ACQ key on the control head. The selected plot symbol is marked at the cursor
position.
Note that the plot symbol is drawn by broken lines during the initial tracking stage. A vector
appears in about one minute after acquisition indicating the target's motion trend. If the target
is consistently detected for three minutes, the plot symbol changes to a solid mark. If
acquisition fails, the target plot symbol blinks and disappears shortly.
(a) Immediately after acquisition, this plot
symbol is shown in broken lines.
(b) Within 20 scans of antenna after
acquisition, a vector appears to show a
trend of movement.
(c) Within 60 scans of antenna after
acquisition, the plot symbol changes to a
small circle indicating steady-state
tracking condition.
Notes:
1) For successful acquisition, the target to be acquired should be within 0.2 to 32 nm from
own ship and not obscured by sea or rain clutter.
2) When you have acquired 40 targets manually, the message MAN TARGET FULL is
displayed at the screen bottom. Cancel tracking of non-threatening targets if you wish to
acquire additional targets manually. (See "Terminating tracking of acquired targets" on
page 2-9.)
-2.10-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.7 Changing Plot Symbol Size
Press a desired plot symbol key, and the symbol is enlarged for about 7 seconds.
You may also choose plot symbol size. To choose a large or standard size for all plot symbols:
1. Press the PLOT MENU key followed by the [0] key to show the ARPA 2 menu.
2. Press the [6] key to select MARK SIZE.
3. Further press the [6] key to select (or highlight) STANDARD or LARGE as appropriate.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection followed by the PLOT MENU key to
close the ARPA 2 menu.
CAUTION - TARGET SWAP
When a target being tracked nears another target being tracked, the targets may
be “swapped”. When two targets acquired either automatically or manually come
close to each other, one of the two may become a Lost Target. Should this
happen, manual re-acquisition of the Lost Target may be required after the two
have separated.
-2.11-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ARPA symbols
The symbols used in this equipment comply with IEC 60872-1.
Item
Symbol
Status
Remarks
Automatically
acquired
targets
Initial stage
epvs symbol no. 3
Broken square around an echo to
indicate the target under acquisition and
initial stage of tracking, before
steady-state tracking.
Between 20 and 60 scans of antenna
after acquisition (vector still unreliable)
Solid circle with vector indicating steady
state tracking (60 scans after acquisition)
Plot symbol changes to an equilateral
triangle flashing to indicate the target is
predicted to come into CPA or TCPA.
epvs symbol no. 3
Steady tracking
epvs symbol no. 4a
CPA alarm
epvs symbol no. 8
(flashing)
(flashing)
CPA alarm
acknowledge
epvs symbol no. 8
Lost target
Flashing stops after CPA/TCPA alarm is
acknowledged.
Lost target is indicated by flashing
diamond symbol. The diamond is formed
from two equal triangles.
epvs symbol no. 9
Manually
acquired
targets
Initial stage
epvs symbol no. 3
Plot symbol selected for a target
acquired manually is shown in bold
broken lines.
Bold broken square for 20 - 60 scans of
antenna after acquisition
Manual plot symbol in a bold solid circle
(60 scans after acquisition)
Plot symbol changes to an equilateral
triangle flashing if a target is predicted to
come into the preset CPA or TCPA.
epvs symbol no. 3
Steady tracking
epvs symbol no. 4a
CPA alarm
(collision course)
epvs symbol no. 8
(flashing)
Flashing stops after CPA/TCPA alarm is
acknowledged.
epvs symbol no. 8
Lost target
Lost target is indicated by flashing
diamond symbol. The diamond is formed
from two equal triangles (one apex up
and the other apex down).
Plot symbol changes to an equilateral
triangle, apex down, flashing together
(flashing)
(flashing)
epvs symbol no. 9
On target passing
through
guard zone
alarm
operator-set guard with vector if target entering guard zone.
zone
epvs symbol no. 7
automatic
acquisition
area
5.5 - 6.0 nm, 3 -
3.5 nm or
anywhere
Sector or full circle as selected by the
operator.
epvs symbol no. 2
Target selected
for data
On selected target Target data (range, bearing, course,
1
speed, CPA and TCPA)
epvs symbol no. 12
readout
-2.12-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
target
On reference target Used to calculate own ship’s
over-the-ground speed (target-based
speed) for ground stabilization.
R
In 60 scans,
changes to
R
○
ARPA symbols (continued)
ITEM
Trial maneuver
SYMBOL
T
STATUS
Bottom center
REMARKS
Appears during execution of a trial
maneuver.
EPVS SYMBOL NO. 10
(flashing)
Performance
test
Bottom center
Appears during execution of a
performance test.
X X
EPVS SYMBOL NO. 11A
(flashing)
NON-ARPA SYMBOLS for Radar
ITEM
SYMBOL
STATUS
REMARKS
Non-ARPA
symbols
These are non-ARPA symbols, but only on
Radar mode. Not available in the ARPA
mode.
-2.13-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.8 Adjusting Brilliance of Plot Marks
1. Press the RADAR MENU and [0] key to show the FUNCTIONS 2 menu.
2. Press the [9] and [0] key to show the BRILLIANCE 2 menu.
3. Press the [2] key to select PLOT BRILL.
4. Further press the [2] key to select (or highlight) a desired brilliance level.
5. Press the ENTER key to confirm your selection followed by the RADAR MENU key to
close the BRILLIANCE 2 menu.
Note: Refer to paragraph 1.37 for the BRILLIANCE menu screen.
2.9 Displaying Target Data
The ARPA mode (with built-in ARP-26 optional board) provides the full functionality of
ARPA as required by the IMO Resolution A.823(19) and IEC 60972-1, including display of
range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and TCPA of all plotted targets. Data on 3 targets may be
displayed on the text area at a time.
In head-up and head-up true bearing modes, target bearing, course and speed shown in the
upper-right target data field become true (suffix "T") or relative (suffix "R") to own ship in
accordance with the true/relative vector setting. In north-up, course-up and true motion modes,
the target data field always displays true bearing, true course and speed over the ground.
Place the cursor on a desired target and press the [TARGET DATA] key. Target data display
is as below.
RNG/BRG (Range/Bearing): Range and bearing from own ship to the selected target with
suffix "T" (True) or "R" (Relative).
CSE/SPD (Course/Speed): Course and speed are displayed for the selected target with suffix
"T" (True) or "R" (relative).
CPA/TCPA: CPA(Closest Point of Approach) is the closest range a target will approach to
own ship. TCPA is the time to CPA. Both CPA and TCPA are automatically calculated.
When the CPA has passed clear of own ship, it is indicated by a TCPA with a negative (-)
sign. TCPA is counted to 99.9 min and beyond this, it is indicate as TCPA> -99.9MIN.
-2.14-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Target accessed for data readout
Target on collision course
Target in GZ
Target being accessed for data readout
is marked □1, 2 ,...etc.
000
350
010
020
340
330
030
320
040
1
RNG
BRG
CSE
SPD
CPA
3.4 NM
25.5°R
264.0°R
12.3 KT
2.9 NM
310
300
050
060
070
080
1
RNG: Range from own ship to target
BRG: Bearing from own ship to target
in R (Relative) or T (True)
290
TCPA 12.2MIN
280
270
BCR
BCT
1.7NM
20MIN
CSE: Course of target, True or
Relative
090
100
260
250
240
Guard Zone
SPD: Speed of target
110
120
130
CPA: Closest Point of Approach of
target to own ship
230
220
Acquisition Zone
TCPA: Time to CPA
140
210
150
BCR: Bow crossing range of target
BCT: Bow crossing time of target
200
160
170
190
180
2.10 Vector modes
Target vectors can be displayed relative to own ship's heading (Relative) or north (True).
Ground stabilization and Sea Stabilization
Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized. Sea stabilization is a mode where
own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea using gyro heading and single axis log water
speed inputs in True Motion mode. Ground stabilization is a mode where own ship and all
targets are referenced to the ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs. If the
accuracy seems unsatisfactory, enter the set and drift correction (section 2.12).
True vector
Vector mode, True or Relative, is selected with the VECTOR key. With true vectors the radar
display will look like the one shown below.
In the true motion mode, all fixed targets such as land, navigational marks and ships at anchor
remain stationary on the radar screen with vector length zero. But in the presence of wind
and/or current, vectors appear on fixed targets representing the reciprocal of set and drift
affecting own ship unless set and drift values are properly entered.
-2.15-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
A
Buoy
Buoy
Target on colli-
sion course
Target on collision course
Own ship
Own ship
B
B
(a) True vectors in head-up mode
(b) Relative vectors in head-up mode
Relative vector
With relative vectors the radar display will look like (b).
Relative vectors on targets which are not moving over the ground such as land, navigational
marks and ships at anchor will represent the reciprocal of own ship’s ground track. A target of
which vector extension passes through own ship is on the collision course. (Dotted lines in the
figure are for explanation only.)
Vector time
Vector time (or the length of vectors) can be set to 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 15 or 30 minutes
and the selected vector time is indicated at the upper-right corner of the screen.
1. Press the PLOT MENU key to display the ARPA 1 menu.
2. Press the [1] key to select the VECTOR TIME option.
3. Further press the [1] key to select (or highlight) a desired vector time.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection.
5. Press the PLOT MENU key to close the menu.
The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected vector time elapses.
It can be valuable to extend the vector length to evaluate the risk of collision with any target.
R/N/W version: ARPA vector time can be programmed onto the function key. (e.g. pressing
the function key can change the vector time.)
2.11 Past Position Display
The ARPA displays equally time-spaced dots marking the past positions of any targets being
tracked.
A new dot is added every minute (or at preset time intervals) until the preset number is reached.
If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes the course, its plotted
course will not be a straight line.
-2.16-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying and erasing past positions
To display past positions;
1. Press the [PLOT MENU] and [0] key to display the ARPA 2 menu.
[ARPA 2]
1 [ARPA 1]
2 TRIAL MODE
3 HISTORY
STATIC/DYNAMIC
OFF/1/2
4 HISTORY POINTS
5 HISTORY INTVL
6 MARK SIZE
5/10/20
30S/1/2/3/6MIN
STD/LARGE
7 GUARD, ACQUISITION STABILIZE NORTH/CRT
8 INPUT SIG CHECK
9 ARPA TRACK TEST
0 ARPA INITIAL SETTING
2. Press [3] key twice to select HISTORY ON.
3. Press the ENTER key followed by the PLOT MENU key.
The label HISTORY appears at the upper-right corner of the screen.
To erase past positions; press the [3] key twice on the ARPA 2 menu.
Selecting the number of dots and past position plot intervals
1. Press the PLOT MENU and [0] key to show the ARPA 2 menu.
2. Press the [4] key to select menu item HISTORY POINTS.
3. Further press the [4] key to select a desired number of past positions (5, 10 or 20). The
IMO-type has the selection of only 5 or 10.
4. Press the ENTER key to confirm your selection.
5. Press the [5] key to select menu item HISTORY INTERVAL.
6. Further press the [5] key to select a desired past position plot interval (0.5, 1, 2, 3 or 6
minutes).
7. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection.
8. Press the PLOT MENU key to close the menu.
2.12 Set and Drift (Set and Rate)
Set, the direction in which a water current flows, can be manually entered in 0.1-degree steps.
Drift, in another word Rate, the speed of tide, can also be entered manually in 0.1 knot steps.
-2.17-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set and drift corrections are beneficial for increasing the accuracy of vectors and target data.
The correction is best made in the head-up mode with true vectors, watching landmasses, or
other stationary targets. Thus, the speed and course of own ship over the ground are
reciprocally calculated and compared with the relative bearing and range to the reference
target to produce a Set and Drift. These values are automatically applied to all targets. If
stationary targets have vectors, set and drift values should be adjusted until they lose vectors.
Proceed as follows to enter set and drift (rate):
1. Press the RADAR MENU key to show the FUNCTIONS 1 menu.
2. Press the [0] key to show the FUNCTIONS 2 menu.
3. Press the [7] key to select menu item SET, DRIFT.
4. Further press the [7] key to select OFF or MAN option.
OFF: No correction against set and drift.
MAN: Manual entry of set and drift data.
5. If OFF is selected, press the ENTER key.
6. If you have selected MAN in step 4 above, the highlight cursor will advance to right
requesting you to enter SET xxx.x°. Enter the value of set in degrees by hitting numeric
keys without omitting leading zeroes, if any, and press the ENTER key.
The highlight cursor will then advance to the next line DRIFT xx.xKT. Enter the value of
drift in knots by hitting numeric keys without omitting leading zeroes, if any, and press the
ENTER key. Set and drift have the same effect on own ship and all targets.
7. Press the RADAR MENU key to close the menu. The label LOG (or NAV) on the top of
the display changes to SMG xx.x KTBT, where SMG stands for Speed Made Good and BT,
Bottom Track. Set and drift data can also be used in the basic radar without ARPA
function.
2.13 Setting CPA/TCPA Alarm Ranges
The ARPA continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach (CPA)
and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each tracked target to own ship.
When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm range and its
predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, the ARPA releases an aural alarm and
displays the warning label COLLISION on the screen. In addition, the ARPA symbol changes
to a triangle and flashes together with its vector.
Provided that this feature is used correctly, it will help prevent the risk of collision by alerting
you to threatening targets. It is important that GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar
controls are properly adjusted.
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size, tonnage,
speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.
-2.18-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
CPA/TCPA Alarm
The CPA and TCPA alarm feature should never be relied upon as the sole means for
detecting the risk of collision.
The navigator is not relieved of the responsibility to keep visual lookout for avoiding collisions,
whether or not the radar or other plotting aid is in use.
To set the CPA/TCPA alarm ranges:
1. Press the PLOT MENU key to show the ARPA 1 menu.
2. Press the [8] key to select menu item COLLISION ALARM. At this point, a highlight
cursor appears at the "CPA x.x NM" field.
3. Enter the CPA alarm range in nautical miles (0.0 to 9.9 nm) without omitting leading
zeroes, if any, and press the ENTER key. The highlight cursor now moves to the "TCPA
xx.x MIN" field.
4. Enter the TCPA alarm limit in minutes (1.0 to 99.9 min) without omitting leading zeroes, if
any, and press the ENTER key.
5. Press the PLOT MENU key to close the menu.
Acknowledging CPA/TCPA audible alarm
Press the AUDIO OFF key to acknowledge and silence the CPA/TCPA aural alarm.
The warning label COLLISION and the flashing of the triangle plot symbol and vector remain
on the screen until the dangerous situation is gone or you intentionally terminate tracking of
the target by using the CANCEL key.
2.14 Setting a Guard Zone
When a target transits the operator-set guard zone, the buzzer sounds and the indication
GUARD turns red at the screen bottom. The target causing the warning is clearly indicated
with an inverted flashing triangle.
-2.19-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
Guard zone (GZ)
The Guard Zone Alarm feature should never be relied upon as
a sole means for detecting the risk of collision.
The navigator is not relieved of the responsibility to keep visual
lookout for avoiding collisions, whether or not the radar or other
plotting aid is in use.
Activating the guard zone
One or two guard zones may be selected. The NO. 1 guard zone is available between 3 and 6
nm and NO. 2 guard zone can be set anywhere when the NO. 1 zone is already in use.
To set and activate the guard zone:
1. Press the PLOT MENU key to show the ARPA 1 menu.
2. Press the [4] key to select menu item GUARD ZONE.
3. Further press the [4] key to select (or highlight) ON to activate the guard zone.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection.
5. Press the [5] key to select menu item GUARD ZONE SET. At this point the GUARD
ZONE SET menu is displayed at the screen bottom.
[GUARD ZONE SET]
1 [ARPA 1]
2 1/2
SET LEFT/RIGHT BOUNDARY
CANCEL PREVIOUS AREA: CANCEL KEY
6. Press the [2] key and ENTER key. ([2] [2] [ENTER] when setting the No. 2 zone.)
7. Referring to figure below, place the cursor at the outer left corner of the area (point A) and
press the ENTER key.
8. Place the cursor at the right edge of the area (point B) and press the ENTER key.
Note: If you wish to create a guard zone having a 360-degree coverage around own ship,
set point B in almost the same direction (approx. ±3°) as point A and press the ENTER
key.
If the range scale is changed to less than half of GZ, the label GZ OUT appears in red at the
upper right corner of the screen.
-2.20-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Press the [1] key followed by the PLOT MENU key to close the ARPA 1 menu.
The guard zone like an example below appears on the display. Note that the guard zone has a
fixed radial extension (width) of 0.5 nm. The label GZ is displayed in the box at the
upper-right on the screen when guard zone is enabled.
A
0.5nm
NO. 1 Guard Zone (GZ) is available between 3 and 6 nm with a fixed
range depth of 0.5 nm. NO. 2 GZ may be set anywhere when the NO.
1 GZ is valid.
B
Target in a guard zone is
marked by inverted flashing
triangle whichever is heading.
Two more alarm zones (NO. 1 and NO. 2 Target Alarm Zones = TAZ)
may be added in addition. This means a maximum 4 alarm zones are
available at a time. ARPA symbols are not changed to inverted
triangles in the TAZ, only those in GZ do so.
Deactivating the guard zone
1. Press the PLOT MENU key to show the ARPA 1 menu.
2. Press the [4] key to select menu item GUARD ZONE.
3. Further press the [4] key to select (or highlight) OFF to deactivate the guard zone.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection followed by the PLOT MENU key to
close the menu.
To acknowledge the guard zone alarm
Press the AUDIO OFF key to acknowledge and silence the guard zone aural alarm.
2.15 Operational Warnings
There are six main situations which cause the ARPA to trigger visual and aural alarms:
• CPA/TCPA alarm
• Guard zone alarm
• Lost target alarm
• Target full alarm for manual acquisition
• Target full alarm for automatic acquisition
• System failures
CPA/TCPA alarm
Visual and aural alarms are generated when the predicted CPA and TCPA of any target
become less than their preset limits. Press the AUDIO OFF key to acknowledge and silence
the CPA/TCPA aural alarm.
-2.21-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Guard zone alarm
Visual and aural alarms are generated when a target transits the operator-set guard zone. Press
the AUDIO OFF key to acknowledge and silence the guard zone aural alarm. (Refer to
paragraph 2.14 Setting a Guard Zone for further information.)
Lost target alarm
When the system detects a loss of a tracked target, the target symbol becomes a flashing
diamond ( ) and the label "LOST" appears at the screen bottom. At the same time, an aural
alarm is produced for one second.
Press the LOST TARGET key to acknowledge the lost target alarm. Then, the lost target mark
disappears.
Target full alarm
When the memory becomes full, the memory full status is indicated and the relevant
indication appears on the screen and a short beep sounds.
Manually acquired targets
The indication "MAN TARGET FULL" appears at the screen bottom and a short beep tone
sounds when the number of manually acquired targets reaches 20 or 40 depending on whether
auto acquisition is activated or not.
Automatically acquired targets
The indication "AUTO TARGET FULL" appears at the screen bottom and a short beep tone
sounds when the number of automatically acquired targets reaches 20.
System failure alarm
When the ARP board receives no signal input from the radar or external equipment, the screen
shows both "SYSTEM FAIL" associated with an indication denoting offending equipment,
also releasing an aural alarm. The missing signals are denoted as shown below:
Missing Signal
Indication
LOG
* Speed log signal
* Heading signal, Gyrocompass
Trigger signal from radar
Video from radar
GYRO
TRIGGER
VIDEO
* Bearing signal from radar antenna AZIMUTH
* Heading pulses from radar antenna HEADLINE
* The alarm is available with or without ARPA.
-2.22-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.16 Trial Maneuver
Trial simulates the effect on all tracked targets against own ship's maneuver without
interrupting the updating of target information.
There are two types of trial maneuvers: static and dynamic.
Dynamic trial maneuver
A dynamic trial maneuver displays predicted positions of the tracked targets and own ship.
You enter own ship's intended speed and course with a certain "delay time." Assuming that all
tracked targets maintain their present speeds and courses, the targets' and own ship's future
movements are simulated in one-second increments indicating their predicted positions in
one-minute intervals as illustrated below.
The delay time represents the time lag from the present time to the time when own ship will
actually start to change her speed and/or course. You should therefore take into consideration
own ship's maneuvering characteristics such as rudder delay, turning delay and acceleration
delay. This is particularly important on large vessels. How much the delay is set the situation
starts immediately and ends in a minute.
In the example shown below, own ship will advance straight ahead (even after a maneuver)
for a delay time of 5 minutes and then alters speed and course until operator-specified
intended speed and course are achieved (position OS7 in this example).
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
OS8
OS7
OS6
OS5
B1
B0
A8
A7
B
OS4
OS3
A6
A5
Delay time = 5 min.
OS2
OS1
OS0
A4
A3
Present own
ship position
A2
A1
A0
A
T
Dynamic trial maneuver
Note that once a dynamic trial maneuver is initiated, you cannot alter own ship's trial speed,
course or delay time until the trial maneuver is terminated.
-2.23-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Static trial maneuver
A static trial maneuver displays only the final situation of the simulation. If you enter the same
trial speed, course and delay time under the same situation as in the aforementioned example
of dynamic trial maneuver, the screen will instantly show position OS7 for own ship, position
A7 for target A and position B7 for target B, omitting the intermediate positions. Thus, the
static trial maneuver will be convenient when you wish to know the maneuver result
immediately.
Note: For accurate simulation of ship movements in a trial maneuver, own ship's
characteristics such as acceleration and turning performance should be properly set in initial
settings at the time of installation.
To perform a trial maneuver:
1. Press the PLOT MENU key followed by the [0] key to show the ARPA 2 menu.
[ARPA 2]
1 [ARPA 1]
2 TRIAL MODE
3 HISTORY
STATIC/DYNAMIC
OFF/1/2
4 HISTORY POINTS
5 HISTORY INTVL
6 MARK SIZE
5/10/20
30S/1/2/3/6MIN
STD/LARGE
7 GUARD, ACQUISITION STABILIZE NORTH/CRT
8 INPUT SIG CHECK
9 ARPA TRACK TEST
0 ARPA INITIAL SETTING
2. Press the [2] key to select TRIAL MODE.
3. Further press the [2] key to select (or highlight) STATIC or DYNAMIC trial maneuver
option as appropriate.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your selection followed by the [1] key to go back to the
ARPA menu.
5. Press the VECTOR key to select true or relative vector.
6. Press the [9] key on the ARPA 1 menu. The TRIAL DATA SETTING menu appears at the
screen bottom associated with the current own ship's speed and course readouts.
TRIAL DATA SETTING
[DYNAMIC MODE]:
SPEED (VRM)
COURSE (EBL)
DELAY TIME
15.0KT
53.6°
xx.xMIN
TRIAL MANEUVER START? (YES/NO)
TRIAL MANEUVER END? (YES/NO)
TRAIL MANEUVER RESTART? (YES/NO)
TRAIL MANEUVER END? (YES/NO)
Note: The second line reads [STATIC MODE] in the event of a static trial maneuver.
-2.24-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Enter own ship's intended speed, course and delay time in the following manner:
Speed:
Course:
Set with the VRM control.
Set with the EBL control.
Delay time: Enter in minutes by hitting numeral keys. This is the time after which own ship
takes a new situation, not the time the simulation begins. Change the delay
time according to own ship loading condition, etc.
8. Press the [9] key again on the ARPA 1 menu to start a trial maneuver. During trial
maneuver, REL/TRUE vector can be selected.
9. Press the PLOT MENU to close the menu.
Trial maneuver takes place in three minutes with the letter "T" displayed at the bottom of the
screen. If any tracked target is predicted to be on a collision course with own ship (that is, the
target ship comes within preset CPA/TCPA limits), the target plot symbol changes to a triangle
(∆) and flashes. If this happens, change own ship's trial speed, course or delay time to obtain a
safe maneuver. The trial maneuver is automatically terminated and the normal radar picture is
restored three minutes later.
R/N/W versions: Target data in the trail maneuver mode is affected by the trail data.
"CAUTION! TARGET DATA IS THE RESULT OF TRIAL" is displayed. (Target data is not
affected on G version.)
Terminating trial maneuver
Press the PLOT MENU key and the [9] key at any time.
2.17 ARPA Performance Test
Test program is provided for assessing the ARPA overall performance. Note that normal
operation is interrupted and the label "XX" is displayed at the bottom of the screen during this
test. The test may be terminated at any moment.
To execute the performance test:
1. Select the north-up presentation mode on the 12 nm range.
2. Enter own ship speed of 0 knots.
3. Press the PLOT MENU key followed by the [0] key to show the ARPA 2 menu.
4. Press the [9] key to select ARP TRACK TEST. The display is cleared and a performance
test picture comes on.
5. Press the ENTER key.
An alert XX flickers during the test. It takes approximately 3 minutes for all vectors to be
displayed. The test does not need echo signals, gyro nor speed log input. 7 targets having
different speeds and courses, as shown in the table below, are simulated automatically.
6. The test continues for 5 minutes and then repeats.
To terminate the track test, press the STBY/TX key twice and the STBY display will appear.
Select any target with the cursor and check that the selected target shows the course and speed
as in the table. CPA and TCPA shown below are initial values which change with time.
-2.25-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
000
350
010
020
340
Target
Course
Speed
(kt)
CPA
(nm)
TCPA
(min)
330
030
E
F
320
040
310
300
290
280
050
060
070
080
Target A
Target B
Target C
Target D
Target E
Target F
Target G
90.0°T
0.0°T
10.0
0.0
1.0
4.0
1.7
0.9
6.0
0.0
4.0
10.4
-
C
A
D
090
100
270
260
180.0°T
216.5°T
273.5°T
180.0°T
24.6°T
10.0
23.8
14.2
20.0
15.6
28.2
15.0
22.5
30.0
43.6
B
250
240
110
120
130
230
XX
140
220
G
210
150
200
160
190
170
180
Note: Note that target numbers are subject to change. If test results show any deviation from
the above, consult with your service representative.
2.18 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking
The FURUNO ARPA video processor detects targets in midst of noise and discriminates radar
echoes on the basis of their size. Target whose echo measurements are greater than those of
the largest ship in range or tangential extent are usually land and are displayed only as normal
radar video. All smaller ship-sized echoes which are less than this dimension are further
analyzed and regarded as ships and displayed as small circles superimposed over the video
echo.
When a target is first displayed, it is shown as having zero true speed but develops a course
vector as more information is collected. In accordance with the International Marine
Organization Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (IMO ARPA) requirements, an indication of the
motion trend should be available within 20 scans of antenna and full vector accuracy within
60 scans. The FURUNO ARPAs comply with these requirements.
Acquisition and tracking
A target which is hit by 5 consecutive radar pulses is detected as a radar echo. Manual
acquisition is done by designating a detected echo with the trackball. Automatic acquisition is
done in the acquisition areas when a target is detected 5-7 times continuously depending upon
the congestion. Tracking is achieved when the target is clearly distinguishable on the display
for 5 out of 10 consecutive scans whether acquired automatically or manually. Required
tracking facilities are available within 0.1-32 nm on range scales including 3, 6, 12 nm, full
plotting information is available within one scan when the range scale has been changed.
Targets not detected in 5 consecutive scans become "lost targets."
Quantization
The entire picture is converted to a digital from called "Quantified Video." A sweep range is
divided into small segments and each range element is "1" if there is radar echo return above a
threshold level, or "0" if there is no return.
-2.26-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The digital radar signal is then analyzed by a ship-sized echo discriminator. As the antenna
scans, if there are 5 consecutive radar pulses with 1’s indicating an echo presence at the exact
same range, a target "start" is initiated. Since receiver noise is random, it is not three bang
correlated, and it is filtered out and not classified as an echo.
The same is true of radar interference. Electronic circuits track both the closet and most distant
edges of the echo. At the end of the scanning of the echo, the discriminator indicates the
measured maximum range extent and total angular extent subtended by the echo. If the echo is
larger than a ship-sized echo in range extent and/or angular width, adjusted as a function of
range, it is declared to be a coastline and the closet edge is put into memory as a map of the
area. This land outline is used to inhibit further acquisition and tracking of ship sized echoes
beyond the closest coast outline. 5 consecutive scans of coastal outline are retained in memory
to allow for signal variation. All smaller echoes are declared to be ship sized and the middle of
the leading edge is used to provide precise range and bearing coordinates of each echo on
every scan. This range/bearing data is matched to previous data and analyzed from
scan-to-scan for consistency. When it is determined to be as consistent as a real target,
automatic acquisition occurs and tracking is initiated. Continued tracking and subsequent
calculation develop the relative course and speed of the target just as a man would do when
plotting the relative course and speed of the target on the scope with a grease pencil.
The true course and speed of own ship are computed from own ship's gyro and speed inputs,
and the resulting course and speed of each tracked target is easily computed by vector
summing of the relative motion with own ship’s course and speed. The resulting true or
relative vector is displayed for each of the tracked targets. This process is updated continually
for each target on every scan of the radar.
Automatic acquisition areas and suppression lines
Performance of auto-acquisition is enhanced by controlling the limit lines (suppression line) in
the former series of FURUNO ARPAs. In this new series of ARPAs, the automatic
acquisition rings are used instead of the limit lines.
Auto acquisition rings work as suppression lines when viewed from the opposite direction.
They should be placed clear of a landmass or shoreline. The acquisition areas may be a full
360 degree circle or sector of any angles are gyro stabilize.
Qualitative description of tracking error
The FURUNO ARPA accuracy complies with or exceed IMO standards.
Own ship maneuvers
For slow turns there is no effect. For very high turning rates (greater than 150°/ minute,
depending on gyro), there is some influence on all tracked targets which last for a minute or
two and then all tracked targets revert to full accuracy.
Other ship maneuvers
Target ship courses, lag 15 to 30 seconds at high relative speed, or 3 to 6 seconds at low (near
0) relative speed. It is less accurate during a turn due to lag, but accuracy recovers quickly.
-2.27-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.19 Factors Affecting ARPA Functions
Sea returns
If the radar anti-clutter control is adjusted properly, there is no serious effect because distant
wave clutter, not eliminated by this control, is filtered out by more than one bang correlation
and scan-to-scan matching of data.
Rain and snow
Clutter can be acquired and tracked as targets. Adjust the A/C RAIN control. If it is heavy rain,
switch to S-band if provided, or switch on the interference rejector on the radar. If heavy
clutter still exists, switch to manual acquisition. Accuracy can be affected.
Low clouds
Usually no effect. If necessary, adjust the A/C RAIN control.
Non-synchronous emissions
No effect.
Low gain
Insufficient or low radar receiver gain will result in some targets not being acquired at long
distance. ARPA display will be missing on one or more targets that could only be visible if the
radar sensitivity control (GAIN control) were increased.
The setting of the correct radar receiver gain is not critical but the target should be on the radar
PPI and be clearly visible and well defined.
Manual acquisition is done if a target is positively displayed more than once. Automatic
acquisition is done when the target is detected 5-7 times continuously. Tracking is achieved
when the target is detected 5 times (not necessarily continuously) out of 10 scans. If not
detected 6 times out of 10 scans, the target will become a "lost target." The ARPA will acquire
a radar echo that is present once in every six antenna scans and continue tracking if 1 in 10.
Second trace echoes
When the radar beam is super refracted, strong echoes may be received at such long ranges
that they appear on a different timebase sweep than the transmitted pulse. This gives an
incorrect range indication. Second and third trace echoes can be tracked if they are consistent
enough to meet acquisition and tracking criteria but target course and speed data will be in
error.
-2.28-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blind and shadow sectors
Radar shadow or blind areas caused by obstructions aboard ship, for example, funnels and
masts, in the path of the radar beam can result in reduction of radar beam intensity in that
particular direction. This may eliminate the detection of some targets. The ARPA system will
lose track of targets shortly after they are lost on the radar picture and if they remain in a blind
zone. These targets will however be acquired and tracked when they pass out of the blind zone
and again present normal radar echo. The angular width and bearing of any shadow sector
should be determined for their influence on the radar. In certain cases false echoes in the
shadow sector cause the ARPA system to acquire, track, and vector them. Shadow sectors
should be avoided.
Indirect echoes
A target at close range is usually picked up directly, but it can also be received as reflection
from a large, flat surface. This will result in the radar presenting two or more echoes on the
display, each at a different range. The ARPA can acquire and track the false echo if it is
detected by five consecutive scans. Reduction in radar GAIN can eliminate the multiple
echoing but care should be taken as range detection also will be reduced.
Radar interference
If interference is extreme due to another radar operating at close range, spiral "dotting" and/or
false targets may appear momentarily. The interference rejector can clear the display.
To receive radar beacon or SART signals, turn off the radar interference rejection and echo
average which operate on the correlation technique.
-2.29-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 RADAR OBSERVATION
3.1 General
Minimum and maximum ranges
Minimum range
The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of 1.5 or 0.75
nm, a target having an echoing area of 10 m2 is still shown separate from the point
representing the antenna position.
It is mainly dependent on the pulselength, antenna height, and signal processing such as main
bang suppression and digital quantization. It is a good practice to use a shorter range scale as
far as it gives favorable definition or clarity of picture. The IMO Resolution MSC.64(67)
Annex 4 (Shipborne radar) and A.820: 1995 (High Speed Craft Radar) require the minimum
range to be less than 50 m and 35 m, respectively. This series of radars satisfy this
requirement.
Maximum range
The maximum detecting range of the radar, Rmax, varies considerably depending on several
factors such as the height of the antenna above the waterline, the height of the target above the
sea, the size, shape and material of the target, and the atmospheric conditions.
Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar horizon or a
little shorter. The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by about 6% because of the
diffraction property of the radar signal. The Rmax is given in the following equation.
R= 2.2 x ( h1 + h2 )
where Rmax:
radar horizon (nautical miles)
antenna height (m)
h1:
h2 :
target height (m)
Radar horizon
Optical horizon
For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the height of the
target is 16 meters, the maximum radar range is;
Rmax= 2.2 x ( 9 + 16 ) = 2.2 x (3 + 4) = 15.4 nm
It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which absorbs the radar
signal).
-3.1-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
X-band and S-band
In fair weather, the above equation does not give a significant difference between X- and
S-band radars. However, in heavy precipitation condition, an S-band radar would have better
detection than an X-band radar.
Radar resolution
There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing resolution and
range resolution.
Bearing resolution
Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display as separate pips the echoes received
from two targets which are at the same range and close together. It is proportional to the
antenna length and reciprocally proportional to the wavelength. The length of the antenna
radiator should be chosen for a bearing resolution better than 2.5° (IMO Resolution). This
condition is normally satisfied with a radiator of 1.2 m (4 ft) or longer in the X-band. The
S-band radar requires a radiator of about 12 feet (3.6 m) or longer.
Range resolution
Range resolution is the ability to display as separate pips the echoes received from two targets
which are on the same bearing and close to each other. This is determined by pulselength only.
Practically, a 0.08 microsecond pulse offers the discrimination better than 35 m as do so with
all FURUNO radars.
Test targets for determining the range and bearing resolution are radar reflectors having an
echoing area of 10 m2.
Bearing accuracy
One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of a target can be
measured. The accuracy of bearing measurement basically depends on the narrowness of the
radar beam. However, the bearing is usually taken relative to the ship’s heading, and thus,
proper adjustment of the heading marker at installation is an important factor in ensuring
bearing accuracy. To minimize error when measuring the bearing of a target, put the target
echo at the extreme position on the screen by selecting a suitable range.
Range measurement
Measurement of the range to a target is also a very important function of the radar. Generally,
there are two means of measuring range: the fixed range rings and the variable range marker
(VRM). The fixed range rings appear on the screen with a predetermined interval and provide
a rough estimate of the range to a target. The variable range marker’s diameter is increased or
decreased so that the marker touches the inner edge of the target, allowing the operator to
obtain more accurate range measurements.
-3.2-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 False Echoes
Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or
disappear even if there are targets. They are, however, recognized if you understand the reason
why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are shown below.
Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a large ship,
bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be observed on the display at
double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of the target as shown below. Multiple
reflection echoes can be reduced and often removed by decreasing the gain (sensitivity) or
properly adjusting the A/C SEA control.
Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side of the beam,
called "sidelobes." If a target exists where it can be detected by the side lobes as well as the
main lobe, the side echoes may be represented on both sides of the true echo at the same range.
Side lobes show usually only on short ranges and from strong targets. They can be reduced
through careful reduction of the gain or proper adjustment of the A/C SEA control.
Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship may be represented at two positions on the screen.
One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and the other is a false echo which
is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on or close to your ship as shown in the figure
below. If your ship comes close to a large metal bridge, for example, such a false echo may
temporarily be seen on the screen.
Target ship
Own
ship
Radar
antenna
True
echo
Radar
mast
Mirror image
of target ship
False
echo
Blind zone
Virtual image by mirror effect
Blind zone by stern block
-3.3-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shadow sectors (see above right)
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar beam. If the angle
subtended at the scanner is more than a few degrees, a non-detecting sector may be produced.
Within this sector targets can not be detected.
3.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)
A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm) radar
within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a
response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency band. When
interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 µs) through the band before beginning a relatively
slow sweep (7.5 µs) through the band back to the starting frequency. This process is repeated
for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART frequency will
match that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver. If the
SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow sweeps will produce a
response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots equally spaced by about 0.64 nautical
miles will be shown.
When the radar to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display my show also the 12
responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses, which also are
equally spaced by 0.64 nautical miles, will be interspersed with the original line of 12 dots.
They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots.
Screen A:When SART
Screen B:When SART
is distant
is close
Lines of 12 dots
are displayed in
concentric arcs.
Echo of SART
24 NM
Radar antenna
beamwidth
Echo of
SART
1.5 NM
Position of
SART
Own ship's
position
Own ship's
position
Position of
SART
SART mark
length
Radar receiver
bandwidth
9500 MHz
9200 MHz
Sweep time
7.5 µs
95 µs
Low speed sweep signal
High speed sweep signal
Sweep start
Showing SART marks on the radar display
To show the SART marks only on the radar display, detune the radar receiver by turning the
TUNE control out of best tuning condition. This erases or weakens all normal radar echoes,
but, the SART marks are not erased because the SART response signal scans over all
frequencies in the 9 GHz band. When the radar approaches the SART in operation, the SART
marks will enlarge to large arcs, blurring a large part of the screen. Reduce the sensitivity and
adjust the sea clutter control of the radar.
-3.4-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Summary to detect SART response
1. Use range scale of 6 or 12 nm as the spacing between the SART responses is about 0.6 nm
(1125 m) to distinguish the SART.
2. Turn off the automatic clutter suppression.
3. Turn off the Interference Rejector.
4. Turn off the Echo Average.
General remarks on receiving SART
Radar range scale
When looking for a SART it is preferable to use either the 6 or 12 nautical mile range scale.
This is because the total displayed length of the SART response of 12 (or 24) dots may extend
approximately 9.5 nautical miles beyond the position of the SART and it is necessary to see a
number of response dots to distinguish the SART from other responses.
SART range errors
When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the SART is at a
range greater than about 1 nm), the position at which the first dot is displayed may be as mush
as 0.64 nm beyond the true position of the SART. When the range closes so that the fast
sweep responses are seen also, the first of these will be no more than 150 meters beyond the
true position.
Radar bandwidth
This is normally matched to the radar pulselength and is usually switched with the range scale
and the associated pulselength. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz are used with long pulses on
long range scales and wide bandwidths of 10-25 MHz with short pulses on short ranges.
A radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so it is
preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the SART.
Radar side lobes
As the SART is approached, side lobes from the radar antenna may show the SART responses
as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed by the use of the anti-clutter sea
control although it may be operationally useful to observe the side lobes as they may be easier
to detect in clutter conditions and also they will confirm that the SART is near to own ship.
-3.5-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Detuning the radar
To increase the visibility of the SART in clutter conditions, the radar may be detuned to
reduce the clutter without reducing the SART response. Radar with automatic frequency
control may not permit manual detune of the equipment. Care should be taken in operating the
radar in the detuned condition as other wanted navigational and anti-collision information may
be removed. The tuning should be returned to normal operation as soon as possible.
Gain
For maximum range SART detection the normal gain setting for long range detection should
be used, i. e., with a light background noise speckle visible.
A/C SEA control
For optimum range SART detection, this control should be set to the minimum. Care should
be exercised as wanted targets in sea clutter may be obscured. Note also that in clutter
conditions the first few dots of the SART response may not be detectable, irrespective of the
setting of the anti-clutter sea control. In this case, the position of the SART may be estimated
by measuring 9.5 nautical miles from the furthest dot back towards own ship.
Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter sea control facilities in which case the operator
is advised to use manual control initially until the SART has been detected. The effect of the
auto sea control on the SART response can then be compared with manual control.
A/C RAIN control
This should be used normally (i.e. to break up areas of rain) when trying to detect a SART
response which, being a series of dots, is not affected by the action of the anti-clutter rain
circuitry. Note that Racon responses, which are often in the form of a long flash, will be
affected by the use of this control.
Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter rain control facilities in which case the operator
is advised to use manual control initially until the SART has been detected. The effect of the
auto sea control on the SART response can then be compared with manual control.
This information is excerpted from IMO SN/Circ 197 OPERATION OF MARINE RADAR FOR SART
DETECTION.
000
350
010
020
340
330
030
3.4 RACON (Radar beacon)
320
040
A RACON is a radar beacon which emits radar receivable
signals in the radar frequency spectrum (X or S band). There are
several signal formats; in general, the Recon signal appears on
the radar screen as a rectangular echo originating at a point just
beyond the position of the radar beacon. It has a Morse coded
pattern. Note that the position on the radar display is not
accurate.
310
300
290
20
050
060
070
00
090
100
110
120
130
270
260
250
240
230
140
220
210
150
200
160
190
170
10
-3.6-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 4 OPERATION OF VIDEO PLOTTER
4.1 General
The Video Plotter RP-26 is an optional circuit board which is accommodated in the display
unit of the radar. It permits use of 2 memory cards, a memory card(RAM) for storing the
operator created radar maps, and the other is a chart card(ROM) storing Furuno made digital
charts.
The memory card enables the operator to create radar maps more precisely than the standard
supplied radar map card (150 points per map). 30 navigation lines may be stored and each line
may contain up to 30 vertexes (waypoints). Five nav lines may be simultaneously shown on
the display. 98 waypoints, numbered 1-98, may be stored. The card permanently retains the
data you have entered from the radar display or by Lat/Long positions. Own ship and other
ship tracks may be stored at a selected interval. To display Nav line, RTE and WPL sentences
are necessary. WPL ID sentence received in figure only. The data can be copied for other
ships of the same shipping company.
Charts are superimposed on the radar picture without disturbing the radar observation. The
chart area is dependent on the radar range in use.
The drive for the ROM card can also drive the Electronic Reference Chart (ERC). The ERC is
a digital chart published by the Japanese Hydrographic Bureau. Note it is not an ENC used for
ECDIS.
-4.1-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 The Video Plotter Display
Press the RADAR MENU. Press [9] once or twice for “Chart plus Radar” or “Radar”.
North marker
000
010
350
020
Separation zone
340
Heading marker
330
030
320
040
Waypoint
310
050
Navline
Target being tracked
W012
060 Own ship safe contour
300
070
290
Heading line
280
080
Planned route
090
270
260
100
Own ship vector
250
110
240
120
Approximate coastline
W011
230
130
140
220
Dangerous side of own
Waypoint
210
ship safe contour may be
marked like this (hatched
line).
150
200
160
190
170
180
Past position
ARPA: Equally time-spaced positions of any targets being tracked.
Note-not equally geographically spaced.
EPA: Past plot positions may not be equally time-spaced, up to the
operator.
4.3 Display Modes
The RP-26 has two motion displays and three presentation modes.
Motion Displays:
Relative Motion (RM),
True Motion (TM)
Presentation Modes: North-up (NU),
Course-up (CU),
Head-up (HU)
Note: HU is not available on RADAR/VIDEO PLOTTER display.
When own ship mark is at a distance from the screen center 3/4 the range in use it is
automatically reset to a point of 75% radius.
-4.2-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precaution for Chart/Memory Card
Both the chart card and memory card are susceptible to sunlight and magnetic material.
• Keep them away from direct sunlight, heat sources and active gases.
• Keep cards away from water and chemicals.
• Keep the connector free of foreign material.
• Do not drop the cards.
How to Display Charts
To display a chart;
1. Insert the chart RAM card in one of 2 slots.
Eject button for upper
card
Drive for chart card
Eject button for lower card
Drive for chart card or RAM
2. Press the RANGE to select the radar range. The chart appears. The following ranges are
available:
0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96 nm
Chart Position Correction
There may be a case where the radar picture does not match the chart overlay. This is due to an
error in the position fixing system (GPS, Loran, etc.) or the different coordinates between the
position fixing system and the radar. You can align chart with the radar image as follows:
1. Press [CHART ALIGN] key. M. ALIGNING appears at the top of the screen.
2. Rotate the trackball to shift the chart (or own ship) to the correct position.
3. Press [CHART ALIGN] again. MAN ALIGNED appears.
No track is displayed and memorized if the chart is aligned.
Canceling chart correction
1. Press [NAV MENU] and [0] to display the VIDEO PLOTTER 2 menu.
2. Press [2] to select NAV DATA POSN.
3. Press [ENTER] to cancel correction. Navaid position data is restored.
The cursor position can be corrected on "ALIGN DATA" submenu in the VIDEO PLOTTER
2 menu. The keying sequence is NAV MENU, 0, 3 (3 ALIGN +CURSOR DATA ON).
+CURSOR POSN M> ALIGN appears at the bottom right of the screen.
-4.3-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 Set- up of Video Plotter Display
Hiding/Showing Graphics
1. Press [NAV MENU] and [8] to display the PLOT DISPLAY SELECT menu. Current
selections appear in reverse video.
Blank items have been turned off on the INITIAL SETTING menu. For further details see
4.11 Initial Settings.
[PLOT DISP SELECT]
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 1]
2 DANGER HIGHLIGHT OFF/ON
3 COAST LINE
4 LAND DENSITY
5 PLACE NAME
6 MARK
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
7 OWN SHIP PLOT
8 TARGET PLOT
9 CONTOUR LINE
0 GRID
OFF/SEPARATE/CONTINUE
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
2. Press appropriate numeral key twice to hide or show graphic.
3. Press [ENTER].
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to hide or show other graphics.
5. Press [NAV MENU] to close the menu.
Note: LAND DENSITY fills (ON) or hollows (OFF) land on an electronic chart. Land will be
hollow when wrong card or wrong scale is used regardless of LAND DENSITY setting.
Hiding/Showing Nav Data
You may select what navigation data to display on the video plotter display as follows:
1. Press [NAV MENU] to display the NAV INFORMATION 1 menu.
[NAV INFORMATION 1]
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 1]
2 SELECT NAVAID
3 OWN SHIP POSN
4 POSN
GPS+LC/DEAD RECKONING
OFF L/L
xx°xx.xxx N/S
xx°xx.xxx E/S
OFF/L/L
5 +CURSOR DATA
6 WPT DATA
OFF/REL/TRUE
7 [NAV LINE]
8 [WAYPOINT]
9 WIND DATA
OFF/ON
0 [NAV INFORMATION 2]
-4.4-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press appropriate numeral key to select both item and option. Press [ENTER] to register
selection.
For "OWN SHIP POSN" (manual input of position), do the following;
1) Press [4].
2) Enter latitude in seven digits.
3) Press [ENTER]. (If necessary to change to coordinate, press [4] and press [ENTER]).
4) Enter longitude in eight digits.
5) Press [ENTER]. (If necessary to change to coordinate, press [5] and press [ENTER]).
3. Press [0] to go to next page, the NAV INFORMATION 2 menu. Select options as you did
on the previous menu. To return to the previous menu, press [1].
[NAV INFORMATION 2]
1 [NAV INFORMATION 1]
2 WIND GRAPH
OFF/ON
3 WIND UNIT
m/s/KT
4 CURRENT DATA
5 CURRENT GRAPH
6 DEPTH DATA
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
7 DEPTH GRAPH
8 [DEPTH SCALE
9 DEPTH UNIT*
OFF/ON
10/20/50/100/200/500
m/ft
0 [NAV INFORMATION 3]
*: Fishing mode only (one type of R-type)
4. Press [0] to display the NAV INFORMATION 3 menu.
[NAV INFORMATION 3]
1 [NAV INFORMATION 2]
2 WATER TEMPERATURE* OFF/ON
3 DATE
OFF/UTC/LOCAL
±xx.xH
4 USE WPL
NAV LINE/WP
5, 6: When the radar is a component of an INS.
5
6
5. To set time indication, press [3] key several time to select OFF, UTC or LOCAL and press
[ENTER].
6. Press [NAV MENU] to close the menu.
4.5 Track
This section provides the information necessary for setting the track display conditions of both
own ship and other vessels.
Stopping Plotting of Own Ship's Track
1. Press [NAV MENU] and [5] key in order.
[OWN SHIP, TARGET PLOT]
-4.5-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 1]
2 RECORD OWN SHIP PLOT OFF/ON
3 OWN SHIP PLOT INTVL
4 OWN SHIP PLOT COLOR
RED/MAGENTA/YEL
10/30SEC/1/2/3/6MIN
*
GRN/CYAN/BLU
OFF/ON
10/30SEC/1/2/3/6MIN
5 RECORD TARGET PLOT
6 TARGET PLOT INTVL
7
8 SMOOTHING
OFF/1/2/3/6/7/8/9
*: R-type only
2. Press [2] twice to select OFF.
3. Press [ENTER].
Own ship's track is neither plotted or saved to the memory. To resume plotting, select ON at
step 2 and press [ENTER].
Stopping Plotting of Other Ship’s Track
1. Press [NAV MENU] and [5] key in order.
2. Press [2] twice to select OFF.
3. Press [ENTER].
Other ship's tracks are neither plotted or saved to the memory. To resume plotting, select ON
at step 3 and press [ENTER].
Track Plotting Interval
The memory stores ship's position in latitude and longitude at a sampling rate set on the OWN
SHIP, TARGET PLOT menu. The position data so stored is used to display past own ship's
track on the screen.
The plotting interval affects track reconstruction. A shorter interval provides more accurate
reconstruction of track, however storage time of the track is reduced.
1. Press [NAV MENU] and [5] in order.
2. To change own ship's track plotting interval, press [3] several times to display desired
plotting interval in reverse video.
3. Press [ENTER].
4. To change ship's track plotting interval, press [6] (several times) to select plotting interval.
5. Press [ENTER].
Plot interval and track storage time
Memory capacity for own ship's track and other ship's track is 6,000 points each. For other
ship's track the 6,000 points is divided equally among ten targets, so there are 600 points per
target. When a track memory becomes full the oldest track is deleted to make room for a new
entry.
-4.6-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If own ship track is stored every minute, 6,000 points of memory represents 100 hours of time
span; 3 min intervals covers 16 days and 16 h. The time span covering one other ship is 1/10
of own ship as a total of 10 other ships equal to one OS.
Memory used
Press [NAV MENU] and [0]. Memory used appears as below:
MEMORY IN USE
OWN SHIP
TARGET
MARK
= 3456
= 1124
= 0021
Smoothing
Even when the vessel is sailing in a straight line the track shown on the display looks irregular.
This is due to signal variation of the external navaid. You can compensate for this irregularity
with smoothing.
A smoothing factor between 1 and 9 is available. OFF provides no smoothing. In most cases a
smoothing setting between 1 and 5 is satisfactory.
1. Press [NAV MENU] and [5] in order.
2. Press [8] to select smoothing factor.
3. Press [ENTER].
Erasing Track
In the busy traffic, the screen may become cluttered. You can remove all or a percentage of
own ship wakes from the memory to clear the display. Wakes of other ships can also be
cleared.
1. Press [NAV MENU].
2. Press [9] to display the PLOTTER ERASE menu.
[PLOTTER ERASE]
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 1]
2 OWN SHIP PLOT
3 TARGET PLOT
4 MARK
30%/50%/80%/ALL
30%/50%/80%/ALL
OFF/ALL
5 WPT
OFF/ALL
6 NAV LINE
OFF/ALL
3. Press [2] several times to select OWN SHIP PLOT and the amount of track points you wish
to erase.
4. Press [ENTER].
5. To erase other ship's track, press [3] to select TARGET PLOT and the amount of track to
erase. To ERASE means an action to remove the relevant data from the memory. Once
removed, the data will not be recalled any more.
6. Press [ENTER].
-4.7-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6 Marks, Lines
Entering Marks
You can inscribe marks on the display to note important points, for example, a buoy or a
wreck. The mark memory capacity is 6,000 points.
Selecting method of entry
Marks can be entered by cursor position or own ship's position.
1. Press [NAV MENU] [0] [6] in order.
2. Press [6] to select method of mark entry; CURSOR, L/L or OWN SHIP POSN.
3. Press [ENTER].
4. Press [NAV MENU].
Entering marks/lines at CURSOR or OWN SHIP POSITION mode
1. Press [MARK] key to display the ENTER MARK menu.
°
MARK
21 LINE CHANGE
22 MAR CANCEL
CANCEL ENTER MAR : CANCEL E
2. Enter mark number to select desired mark, followed by the ENTER key. On the OWN
SHIP POSN mode, selected mark is entered to own ship's position.
3. On the CURSOR mode, operate the trackball to place the cursor on the position desired for
the mark.
4. Press the [ENTER].
5. To escape the mark entry mode, press the CANCEL key.
Entering marks on L/L mode
1. Press the MARK key.
2. Enter latitude by numeric keys followed by the ENTER key.
3. Enter longitude followed by the ENTER key.
4. Enter mark number to select desired mark followed by the ENTER key.
5. To escape the mark entry mode, press the CANCEL key.
-4.8-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Line change feature
The line change allows you to change line type, or to inscribe a separate line. For example,
you want to quit making nav lines and start making a coastline.
1. Press the [MARK] key to open the ENTER MARK menu.
2. Enter 21 to select LINE CHANGE.
3. Enter line no. desired.
4. Enter line.
Erasing marks/lines
When the mark memory becomes full no marks can entered unless you erase unnecessary
marks.
Erasing individual marks
1. Press the [MARK key to open the ENTER MARK menu.
2. Enter 22 (MARK CANCEL).
3. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on the mark you want to erase.
4. Press [ENTER].
Erasing all marks and all lines
1. Press [NAV MENU] and [9] key in order.
2. Press [4] key twice to select MARK OFF followed by [ENTER].
Erasing lines
1. Press the [MARK] key to open the mark menu.
2. Enter 22 for MARK CANCEL.
3. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on the starting or end point of the line you want to
erase. Selecting the intersection of two lines, erasing both lines.
4. Press the [ENTER] key.
4.7 Waypoints
Entering Waypoints
Maximum 98 waypoints, NO. 01- 98, can be entered by the trackball, by latitude and
longitude, or at own ship position.
1. Press [NAV MENU], [4] and [2] key. The following display appears.
-4.9-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[ENTER WPT]
1 [ENTER WPT, NAV LINE]
2 ENTER WPT
3 WPT NO.
CURSOR. L/L /OWN SHIP POSN
xx
xx°xx.xxxN/S
xxx°xx.xxxE/W
2. Press [2] several times to select CURSOR, L/L or OWN SHIP POSITION whichever is
preferred, followed by [ENTER].
3. Press [3] twice.
4. a. By CURSOR:
Operate the trackball to place the cursor at a location desired for
waypoint.
b. By L/L: Enter latitude followed by [ENTER] and longitude followed by [ENTER].
c. By OWN SHIP POSITION: No action in this stage.
5. Enter waypoint number in two digits and press [ENTER].
6. To enter another waypoint, repeat steps 4 and 5.
The Waypoint List
To display all registered waypoints, press [NAV MENU], [1], [4] and [3]. Waypoint 00
through 09 are shown. Empty waypoints have all asterisks. To go to next page, press [0].
Pressing [1] returns to previous page.
[WPT LIST]
1 [ENTER WPT, NAVLINE]
WPT
xx xx° xx.xxxN
xxx° xx.xxxE
xx xx° xx.xxxN
xxx° xx.xxxE
xx xx° xx.xxxN
xxx° xx.xxxE
xx xx° xx.xxxN
xxx° xx.xxxE
xx xx° xx.xxxN
xxx° xx.xxxE
xx xx° xx.xxxN
xxx° xx.xxxE
xx xx° xx.xxxN
xxx° xx.xxxE
xx xx° xx.xxxN
xxx° xx.xxxE
xx xx° xx.xxxN
xxx° xx.xxxE
9 ERASE
WPTxx
0 [WPT LIST 2]
-4.10-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying a Waypoint
A single waypoint may be shown on the display.
1. Press [NAV MENU], [2] to choose the WAYPOINT menu.
[WAYPOINT]
1 [NAV INFORMATION 1]
[WAYPOINT]
1 [NAV INFORMATION 1]
2 WPT MARK
3 WPT
OFF/ON
WPTxx
WPTxx
WPTxx
WPTxx
WPTxx
2 WPT MARK
3 WPT
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
4 WPT LINE
5 WPT NO.
4
5
6
6
7
8 ARRIVAL ALARM
OFF/ON
x.xxNM
7 WPT DATA
8 ARRIVAL ALARM
VIDEO PLOTTER/NAVAID
OFF/ON
x.xxNM
VIDEO PLOTTER selected at 7 WPT DATA
NAVAID selected at 7 WPTDATA
3. Press [2] key twice to select WPT ON and then press [ENTER].
4. Press [3] key.
5. Enter waypoint number in two digits and press [ENTER]. Registered waypoint (01 to 98).
The latitude and longitude position of the waypoint appears on the menu and the waypoint
is displayed on the screen. Five waypoints may be displayed.
To hide a waypoint, press [3] (WPT), enter waypoint to hide, press [2] to show WPT MARK
OFF, select OFF, and then press [ENTER]
Deleting Waypoints
Waypoints can be deleted individually, or collectively through the waypoint list.
Deleting individual waypoints
1. Press [NAV MENU], [4] and [3] to display the WPT LIST 1 menu.
2. Press [0] to display the page which contains the waypoint you want to delete.
3. Press [9] and enter waypoint number in two digits.
4. Press [ENTER].
Deleting all waypoints
1. Press [NAV MENU] and [9] to display the PLOTTER ERASE menu.
2. Press [5] twice followed by [ENTER].
Note: Waypoints used for navigation lines cannot be deleted except by editing or deleting
navigation line.
-4.11-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can show the external waypoint from a navaid by following steps.
1. Press [NAV MENU] and [2] to open WAYPOINT menu.
2. Press [7] to select WPT DATA.
3. If NAVAID is not in reverse video, press [7] again.
4. Press [2]. If ON is not in reverse video, press [2] again.
5. Press the ENTER key.
4.8 Navigation Lines
30 navigation lines may be entered, and each line may have up to 30 waypoints.
Entering New Navigation Line
1. Press [NAV MENU], [4], [5] and [2].
2. Enter navigation line number in two digits and press [ENTER].
3. Enter waypoint number in two digits and press [ENTER].
4. Repeat step 4 to continue entering waypoint numbers.
5. Press [NAV MENU] to register navigation line.
Adding Waypoint to Navigation Lines
To add waypoints to a navigation line;
1. Press [NAV MENU], [4] and [5].
2. Press [2]. Enter navigation line number and press [ENTER] , [CANCEL].
3. Press [8].
4. Enter “FROM” waypoint number to add and press [ENTER].
5. Enter waypoint number to add.
Newly added waypoint
8 ADDING
WPT00 -> 00
9 ····
"from" waypoint
6. Press [NAV MENU] to close the menu.
Removing Waypoints in Navigation Lines
1. Press [NAV MENU], [4] and [5].
2. Press [2] and enter navigation line number and press [ENTER], [CANCEL]
3. Press [9], enter waypoint number and press [ENTER].
-4.12-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nav Line List
Press [NAV MENU], [4] and [6] to display the list.
Deleting individual navigation lines
1. Press [NAV MENU], [4], [6] and [9].
2. Enter navigation line number you want to delete. (The line in use is not deleted.)
3. Press [ENTER].
Deleting all navigation lines
1. Press [NAV MENU] and [9].
2. Press [6] twice to select ALL.
3. Press [ENTER].
Displaying Navigation Lines
Navigation lines may be set up as follows:
1. Press [NAV MENU] and [3].
2. Press [2] to select NAV LINE.
3. If ON is not in reverse video, press [2] again.
4. Press [ENTER].
[NAVLINE]
1 [NAV INFORMATION 1]
2 NAV LINE
OFF/ON
[NAV LINE]
OFF/ON
3 NAV LINE NO.
4 NAV WIDTH
xx/xx/xx/xx/xx
OFF/ON
x.xxNM
1 [NAV INFORMATION]
2 NAV LINE
3
4 NAV WIDTH
OFF/ON
x.xxxNM
OFF/ON
5
5 WPT NO.
6
6 WPT
xx
(x) →• →xx→
(xx) → (xx)
VIDEO PLOTTER/NAVAID
OFF/ON
7
7 NAVLINE DATA
8 ARRIVAL ALARM
8 ARRIVAL ALARM
OFF/ALL
x.xxNM
OFF/ON/REVISED
9 TURNING LINE
x.xxNM
9
VIDEO PLOTTER selected at 7 WPT DATA
NAVAID selected at 7 WPT DATA
5. Press [7] to choose NAV LINE DATA; VIDEO PLOTTER for internally generated
navigation width data or NAVAID for external navaid generated data.
6. Press [ENTER].
7. Press the [3] key, enter in two digits the nav line no(s). (five max.) to display and press
[ENTER]. (To erase a nav line press [3], enter 00 at location of nav line no. on the menu
and press [ENTER].
-4.13-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and press [ENTER].
8. Press [4] to select NAV WIDTH.
9. Enter line width (in nautical miles) and then press [ENTER].
10. To display waypoint number of the route on the display, press [5] to select ON and then
press [ENTER].
11. To skip a waypoint, press [6], enter next waypoint to head to, and then press [ENTER].
12. Press [ENTER].
13. To display navline from navaid, press [NAV MENU], [3], [7] (NAVLINE DATA NAV
AID).
15. Enter navigation line number and then press [ENTER].
-4.14-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.9 Recording & Replaying Data
Formatting Memory Cards
Before you can use a memory card (RAM card) with the RP-26, the card must be formatted.
Formatting prepares the recording surface of the card for use with the system. Insert a new
memory card in the lower slot and follow the procedure below to format it.
1. Press [NAV MENU] and [6] to choose CARD.
2. If RECORD is not in reverse video, press [6] again.
3. Press [ENTER].
[RECORD CARD]
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 1]
2 OWN SHIP PLOT
T
3 TARGET PLOT
4 MARK
A
M
5
6
7
8
9
0 FORMAT
NO/YES
4. Press [0] twice to select YES.
5. Press [ENTER].
-4.15-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Data
When the track memory becomes full, the oldest track is erased to make room for the latest.
Further, when the mark memory becomes full you cannot enter another mark unless you erase
a mark. Thus you should save important data to a memory card.
1. Insert a formatted RAM card into the card drive.
2. Press [NAV MENU] and [6] to choose CARD.
3. If RECORD is not in reverse video, press [6] again.
4. Press [ENTER].
5. To record own ship's track press [2]; target track press [3]; marks press [4]; or radar map
press [5].
6. Enter file name. You may use ten figures.
7. Press [ENTER].
Replaying Data
1. Press [NAV MENU] and [6].
2. If REPLAY is not in reverse video, press [6] again.
3. Press [ENTER].
[REPLAY CARD 1]
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER]
2 XXX
3 XXX
4 XXX
5 XXX
6 XXX
7 XXX
8 XXX
9 XXX
0 [REPLAY CARD 2]
4. Press numeral key to select file to replay. You can go to the next page by pressing [0].
5. Press [ENTER].
-4.16-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.10 Initial Settings
An item on the PLOTTER DISP SELECT menu can be deleted through the VIDEO
PLOTTER INITIAL SETTING menu.
1. Press [NAV MENU].
2. Press [0] twice to display the VIDEO PLOTTER INITIAL SETTING menu.
[VIDEO PLOTTER INITIAL SETTING]
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 2]
2 DANGER HIGHLIGHT
3 COASTLINE
4 LAND DENSITY
5 PLACE NAME
6 MARK
7 OWN SHIP PLOT
8 TARGET PLOT
9 CONTOUR LINE
0 GRID
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
3. Press appropriate numeral key to turn on or off item.
4. Press [ENTER].
5. Repeat 3 and 4.
NOTE: If Video Plotter fails to provide intended functions, turn ON the required functions on this
menu.
4.11 Latitude Error Table (on 96 nm range scale)
The longitude lines concentrate on the north pole and south pole, namely, 1 nm is equivalent
to 1 minute at 0 degree latitude, 2 minutes at 60 degrees latitude, 3 minutes at 70 degrees
latitude and so on. For this reason, a longitude error occurs on the radar display. For example,
when own ship is at 60°N and 135°E, even if the cursor indication is 62°N and 139°E, the real
cursor position is deviated to left (west) side. The table below shows the longitude error,
represented from 0° to 90° at 96 nm from the radar center (own ship).
Real crsor position
Real crsor position
R: Error
62°N
62°N
Crsor position
indeicated
Crsor position
indicated
96 nm
θ
60°N
LAT
E
139°E
135°E
OS position
-4.17-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EBL
LAT
5°
10°
15°
20°
25°
30°
35°
40°
45°
75°
70°
65°
60°
55°
50°
45°
40°
35°
30°
25°
20°
15°
10°
5°
0.2256
0.21980213 0.43290201 0.632803
0.21229339 0.41810678 0.61115946 0.78556318 0.93600295 1.05790007 1.14755221 1.20224625 1.22034042
0.20316898 0.40012949 0.58486463 0.75173456 0.89565021 1.0122297 1.09793265 1.15016811 1.16737294
0.4444
0.6496
0.8350
0.9950
1.1248
1.2202
1.2786
1.2980
0.8134132
0.96923215 1.09551918 1.1884382
1.24517456 1.26402037
0.19249832 0.37910698 0.55411863 0.71218478 0.84848102 0.95885565 1.03998717 1.08933651 1.10552105
0.18036264 0.35519924 0.51915545 0.66721485 0.79485438 0.89818413 0.97406698 1.02021439 1.03525547
0.16685429 0.32858822 0.48024119 0.61716701 0.73517843 0.83067689 0.90076355 0.94332783 0.95711098
0.15207608 0.29947644 0.437672
0.13614047 0.26808546 0.39177186 0.53339693 0.59953781 0.67725844 0.73420069 0.76865661 0.77961957
0.11916876 0.2346542 0.3428901 0.44054055 0.52460545 0.59251483 0.6422089 0.67220131 0.68162348
0.56242216 0.66990732 0.7568477
0.82060477 0.85926197 0.87168229
0.10129001 0.19943707 0.29139874 0.37433139 0.44568053 0.50326182 0.54532952 0.57063015 0.57843983
0.08264056 0.16270211 0.23768966 0.30527334 0.36336372 0.41017869 0.44429984 0.46471615 0.47085389
0.06336208 0.12472888 0.18217162 0.23389198 0.27828148 0.31397386 0.33988878 0.35526538 0.35968447
0.04360137 0.0858064
0.02350833 0.04623087 0.0674093
0.00323737 0.0063035 0.00903844 0.01130406 0.01299309 0.01403609 0.0144058
0.12526714 0.16073056 0.19108136 0.21537949 0.23289096 0.24311083 0.24577764
0.08634588 0.10242699 0.11514595 0.1241207 0.12910605 0.13000029
0°
0.0141187
0.01323356
EBL
50°
55°
1.2192
60°
1.1233
65°
0.9933
70°
0.8332
75°
0.6479
80°
0.4431
85°
90°
LAT
75°
70°
65°
60°
55°
50°
45°
40°
35°
30°
25°
20°
15°
10°
5°
1.2780
1.24442563 1.18701379 1.09356117 0.96694117 0.81103484 0.3061092
1.20131324 1.14577786 1.05546143 0.93315023 0.78260251 0.60843159 0.41596331 0.21107193
1.14905813 1.09582188 1.00932899 0.89225746 0.74821409 0.58162173 0.397582 0.20171772
1.08805799 1.03752602 0.95551494 0.84457408 0.70813132 0.55038538 0.37617487 0.19082831
1.0187708 0.97133397 0.89442885 0.79046297 0.66265924 0.51496026 0.35190481 0.17848659
0.2249
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.43117887 0.21881975
0.94174265 0.89774948 0.82653562 0.73033596 0.61214392 0.47561599 0.32495654 0.16478648
0.85754099 0.81733258 0.75235195 0.66465066 0.55696981 0.43265198 0.29553516 0.14983224
0.76681293 0.73069528 0.63744242 0.59390696 0.49755683 0.38639524 0.26386458 0.13373769
0.67024897 0.63849695 0.58741521 0.51864327 0.43435714 0.33719779 0.23018583 0.11662531
0.568584
0.46259176 0.44026091 0.40463016 0.35687717 0.29854675 0.23149802 0.15784242 0.07987479
0.35307892 0.3357319 0.30826343 0.2716059 0.22696965 0.17580013 0.11972833 0.06051633
0.2487894 0.22864776 0.20955062 0.18426754 0.15366517 0.1187643
0.12684572 0.11982348 0.10624302 0.09552679 0.0791912
0.54143927 0.49791741 0.43943239 0.36785173 0.28543407 0.19475522 0.09862535
0.08070304 0.0406973
0.04106355 0.04106355 0.02056855
0°
0.01184713 0.01008727 0.008104
0.00605903 0.00411455 0.00111154 0.00111154 0.00028325
-4.18-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.12 Plotter Presentation Mode
The plotter presentation mode lets you use factory preset settings or user settings for colors,
brilliance and background of the radar screen; brilliance and color for chart elements and chart
data on/off.
1. Press the [NAV MENU] key.
2. Press the [7] key to select PLOTTER PRESENTATION.
3. Press the [7] key again to select DEFAULT or USER SET.
4. Press the [ENTER] key.
5. Press the [NAV MENU] key to finish.
Below are the settings of DEFAULT.
Item
Default Setting
Radar color, brilliance, background
Background color
Echo color
Black
Yellow
Bright
M2
Head line
Plot brilliance
Range rings
OFF
Brilliance and color of chart elements
Chart
M1
M1
M1
Symbols
L/L grid
Chart information
Danger highlight
Coast line
Land density
Place name
Marks
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Own ship plot
Target plot
Contour line
Grid
-4.19-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Do not open the equipment.
Hazardous voltage which can
cause electrical shock exists
inside the equipment. Only
qualified personnel should
work inside the equipment.
Turn off the radar power
switch before servicing the
antenna unit. Post a warn-
ing sign near the switch
indicating it should not be
turned on while the antenna
unit is being serviced.
Prevent the potential risk of
being struck by the rotating
antenna and exposure to
RF radiation hazard.
Wear a safety belt and hard
hat when working on the
antenna unit.
Serious injury or death can
result if someone falls from
the radar antenna mast.
Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any electronic systems.
This chapter contains maintenance instructions to be followed to obtain optimum performance
and the longest possible life of the equipment.
5.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule
Interval
Check point
Check and measures
Check for corroded or loosened Sealing compound may be used
nuts and bolts. If necessary, instead of paint. Apply a small
clean and repaint them thickly. amount of grease between nuts
Remarks
3 to 6
months
Exposed nuts and
bolts on antenna
unit
Replace them if heavily
corroded.
and bolts for easy removal in
future.
Antenna radiator
Check for dirt and cracks on
radiator surface. Thick dirt
should be wiped off with soft
cloth dampened with fresh
Do not use plastic solvent
(acetone) for cleaning. If you need
to remove ice from antenna unit,
use a wooden hammer or plastic
water. if a crack is found, apply head hammer. Crack on the unit
a slight amount of sealing
compound or adhesive as a
may cause water ingress, causing
serious damages to internal
temporary remedy, then call for circuits.
repair.
-5.1-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Terminal strips and Open antenna cover to check
When closing antenna covers in
position, be careful not to catch
plugs in antenna
unit
terminal strip and plug
connections inside. Also check loose wires between covers and
the rubber gasket of antenna
covers for deterioration.
unit.
6 months to CRT and
High voltage at CRT and
If CRT anode rubber cap or wire
one year
surrounding
components
surrounding components attract sheath is cracked, ask your dealer
dust in environment which will to replace it. Wait for at least 3
cause poor insulation. Ask your minutes until high voltage
nearest FURUNO components (CRT and HV
representative or dealer to clean capacitors) discharge their
internal high-voltage
components.
residual charges before accessing
them.
Terminal strips,
sockets, earth
terminal
Check for loose connections.
Check contacts and plugs for
proper seating, etc.
5.2 Life Expectancy of Major Parts
Parts
Type
Life expectancy
Remarks
Antenna motor D8G-571 (X-band) 42 rpm Gears more than 10,000 h Wind load 100 kt
D8G-516 (X-band) 24 rpm
Magnetron
MG 5241, X-band, 12 kW 2,000 - 3,000 h
MG 5436, X-band, 25 kW
MG 5223F, S-band, 30 kW
MG 5240, S-band, 60 kW
5.3 Replacement of Battery
A battery installed on the RP board or Gyrocompass board inside the display unit help preserve
the data when the power is turned off. The life of the battery is about five years. When the battery
voltage is low, NG appears at diagnostic test for RP board. Contact your dealer for replacement.
Battery Type
ER3s
Code number
000 127 759
000 103 769
RP board
GC board
CR 1/2 8.L
-5.2-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING
Do not open the equipment.
Hazardous voltage which can
cause electrical shock exists
inside the equipment. Only
qualified personnel should
work inside the equipment.
Turn off the radar power
switch before servicing the
antenna unit. Post a warn-
ing sign near the switch
indicating it should not be
turned on while the antenna
unit is being serviced.
Prevent the potential risk of
being struck by the rotating
antenna and exposure to
RF radiation hazard.
Wear a safety belt and hard
hat when working on the
antenna unit.
Serious injury or death can
result if someone falls from
the radar antenna mast.
6.1 Easy Troubleshooting
This paragraph describes how to cure operational problems, which can be made by observing
the radar picture and using operator controls and keys without opening the display unit,
antenna unit or other equipment units.
The table below shows user-level troubleshooting procedures.
Problem
Remedy
Key beep inaudible
No own ship mark
Adjust key beep level on RADAR 2 menu referring to paragraph 1.32.
On the R-type, check that SHIP’S MARK ON is selected at the RADAR 2 menu,
referring to section 1.32. Also, own ship information (length, width, etc.) should
have been entered in initial settings. Consult your service representative or
Furuno dealer for details. On the IMO-type, the own ship marks is not available.
-6.1-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2 Advanced-level Troubleshooting
This paragraph describes how to cure hardware and software troubles which should be carried
out by qualified service personnel.
Note: This radar equipment contains complex modules in which fault diagnosis and repair
down to component level are not practicable by users.
Serviceman qualification
All adjustments of radio transmitter during or coinciding with the installation, servicing, or
maintenance which may affect the proper operation must be performed by or under the
immediate supervision and responsibility of a person holding an operator certificate containing
a ship radar endorsement.
This is what the U.S. Codes of Federal Regulations part 80.169 implies (not exact extract).
As such, every administration sets forth its own rule; service personnel must be aware of this
kind of competency requirements.
Service call
When making a service call to your service agent, check S/N and symptom beforehand.
Problem
Probable causes or check Remedy
points
Power turned on but radar does 1 Blown fuse F1 and F2. 1 Replace blown fuse.
not operate at all.
2
3
4
1
Mains voltage/polarity
Power supply board
Illumination lamps
2 Correct wiring and input voltage.
3 Replace power supply board.
4 Replace defective lamps.
Control panel is not illuminated.
CRT brilliance adjusted but no
picture
RADAR 1/2/3 menu
settings
1 In case of single display installation
without radar interswitching unit, make
sure RADAR 1 is selected on RADAR 3
menu.
2
CRT high tension
voltage
2 Check high tension voltage supply with
utmost care. DANGER.
3
1
SPU board
3 Replace SPU board.
Antenna not rotating
Antenna drive
1 Make sure that there is no short circuit
across #1 and #2 of J461 on IN 9170
board.
mechanism (note that
the message BRG SIG
MISSING appears in
standby.
2
3
Defective antenna
drive motor relay
(thermal relay K2,
200/220/380, 440/100
VAC)
2 Press relay reset button.
INT 9170 board.
3 Check that antenna switch is on.
-6.2-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data and marks not displayed
in Transmit status
1
SPU board
IF amplifier
1 Replace SPU board.
1 Replace IF amplifier.
Adjust GAIN control with A/C
SEA control set at minimum.
Marks and legends appear but
no noise or echo
1
2
Signal cable between
antenna and display
2 Check continuously and isolation of
coaxial cable. Note: Disconnect the plug
and lugs at both ends of coaxial cable
before checking it by ohmmeter.
3 Check video coax line for secure
connection. If connection is good,
replace SPU board.
3
1
Video amplifier board
Marks, legends and noise
appear but no echo
TX fuse F801
(Transmitter unit)
1 If fuse is blown, replace it. If it blows
again, the modulator or associated circuit
may be defective.
(Transmission leak representing
own ship position is absent)
2 Check magnetron current with the check
meter in the sub panel. Replace
magnetron.
2
Magnetron
3
4
Modulator board
SPU board
3 Replace modulator board.
4 Replace SPU board.
Picture not updated or picture
freeze-up
1
Bearing signal generator 1 Check the connection of signal cables.
board (in antenna unit)
2
3
SPU board
2 Replace SPU board.
Video freeze-up
3 Turn off and on the radar.
Incorrect orientation of picture
1
SPU board
1 The message HD SIG MISSING
appears when the heading pulse is not
received during standby.
2
Gyro interface
2 Replace the gyro interface.
TUNE control adjusted but poor 1 Deteriorated magnetron 1 With radar transmitting on 48 nm range,
sensitivity
check magnetron current. If current is
below normal, magnetron may be
defective. Replace it.
2
Detuned MIC
2 Check MIC detecting current. If it is
below normal value, MIC may have
become detuned. MIC must be tuned.
3
4
Dirt on radiator face
3 Clean the radiator surface.
Water ingress to the
waveguide or other
feeder line
4 Remove water from the feeder line.
5
1
Second trace rejection is
ON
5 Disable the second-trace rejecter
referring to section 1.35.
Range changed but radar
picture not changing
Defective range key
1 Try to hit [+] and [-] range keys several
times. If unsuccessful, replacement of
keypad may be required.
2
3
4
SPU board
2 Replace SPU board.
3 Replace mother board.
4 Turn off and on radar.
1 Repair contact of key.
2 Replace SPU board.
Mother board
Video freeze-up
Interference rejector inoperable 1 Bad contact of key
(interference rejection level not
2
SPU board
displayed)
-6.3-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Echo stretch ineffective (Neither 1 SPU board
ES1 nor ES2 is displayed)
1 Replace SPU board.
Only 2 parallel index lines when 1 Incorrect setting of index 1 Set index line interval referring to section
6 lines are wanted
line intervals
1.26.
Range rings are not displayed
1
Adjust the brilliance of
range rings at the
BRILLIANCE 1 menu to
see if intensity is
increased.
1 Replace associated circuit board if
unsuccessful.
2 Replace SPU board.
2
1
SPU board
Poor discrimination in range
Sea clutter control not
functioning properly
1 Improper setting of A/C SEA control. If
A/C SEA is seen only at very close
range, suspect inaccurate frequency of
reference oscillator.
True motion presentation not
working correctly
1
Poor contact of MODE 1 Try to press MODE key a little harder.
key
2 Press MODE key until TM appears.
2
3
4
Selection not accessed
3 Enter correct own ship speed referring to
Speed entry incorrect
TM display inaccurate
section 1.24.
4 Make sure that speed and compass
inputs are accurate.
Target nor tracked correctly
1
Poor definition of targets 1 Adjust A/C SEA and A/C RAIN controls
in sea clutter referring to section 1.13 and 1.14.
6.3 Diagnostic Test
A diagnostic test program is provided to enable testing of major circuit boards in the radar
display unit. Note that the normal radar picture is lost during this test.
Proceed as follows to execute the diagnostic test:
Proceed as follows to execute the diagnostic test:
1. Press the RADAR MENU key to show the FUNCTIONS 1 menu.
2. Press the [0] key three times to show the FUNCTIONS 4 menu.
3. Press the key [3] to select menu item TEST. Then, press the ENTER key.
Program numbers appear. The diagnostic test is executed and the screen shows test results
as shown on the next page. OKs appear for normal operation. If NG (No good) appears,
corresponding components may be defective. Consult your dealer.
4. Small squares displayed at the right bottom of the test result screen are for testing the
control and keys on the operator control panel. As you operate these controls and keys,
corresponding squares are highlighted, indicating that your control/key operations are
properly recognized.
5. To terminate the diagnostic test, press STBY/TX key once or twice.
-6.4-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RADAR MENU
Press [RADAR MENU] key.
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 TARGET TRAILS
2 GUARD ALARM
3 ORIGIN MARK
4 INDEX LINES
5 ZOOM *
1 or 2
1 to 10
6 PULSE WIDTH
7 INT REJECT
8 ARPA
9 VIDEO PLOT
0 [FUNCTION 2]
Press [0] key.
[FUNCTIONS 2]
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK(GRN CHAR)/
BLK(RED CHAR)/
BLU (ECHO AREA)
BLU/
BRT BLU
3 ECHO STRETCH
4 ECHO AVERAGE
OFF/1/2/3
OFF/1/2/3
5 TARGETS COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR*
6 SHIP SPEED
LOG/NAV*/MAN
MAN = xx.xKT
(STW/SOG)
7 SET, DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET = xxx.x°
DRIFT = xx.xKT
8 INDEXLINES
NO. 2 VRM/MAN
MAN = xx.xx NM
9 BRILLIANCE (1)
0 [FUNCTION 3]
Press [0] key.
[FUNCTIONS 3]
[FUNCTIONS 2]
2 RADAR 1
1
3 FUNCTION KEY 1
4 FUNCTION KEY 2
5 FUNCTION KEY 3
6 FUNCTION KEY 4
7 RADAR*
1/2
7 INTERSWITCH
8
9 GYRO SETTING
EBL = xxx.x°
0 [FUNCTIONS 4]
Press [0] key.
[FUNCTIONS 4]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
2
3 TEST
*: R-type only
-6.5-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The test program checks the logic boards and the keyboard. The squares (□) represent the
corresponding keypads. Numerals indicate the position of the controls under check. Note:
Analog controls such as Brilliance, A/C Rain, A/C Sea and Gain controls can not be tested.
FR-2105 TEST
PROGRAM NO
MAIN 0359149103
ARPA 1859038103
ROM
OK
RAM
OK
CRAM
DISPSW
1234
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
1010
0001
DSP
RP
1859039101
0359150102
DRAM
RP BOARD BAT
RP CARD 1
OK
OK
OK
CARD 2
OK
CARD 1 BAT
ANTENNA SPEED
TRIG FREQ
42 RPM
872 Hz
11 V
MAG CURRENT
R. MONITOR
TUNE IND
1.2 V
1.1 V
□ □ □
□ □ □
□
□
□
□
□ □ □
1 2 3
□□ □□ □□
□□
002
2 5 1
0 0 8
□
□
□
□□ □ □ □
□ □ □
To quit press [STBY/TX] key twice.
To quit the test program, press the [STBY/TX] key twice.
-6.6-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
MENU OVERVIEW
[BRILLIANCE 1]
RADAR MENU
1 [FUNCTIONS 2]
2 RINGS BRILL
3 EBL BRILL
4 VRM BRILL
OFF/DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 TARGET TRAILS
5 +CURSOR BRILL OFF/DIM/M1/M2/BRT
6 CHAR BRILL
7 MARK BRILL
8 TRAIL BRILL
9 HL BRILL
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M/BRT
2 TARGET ALARM
3 ORIGIN MARK
4 INDEX LINES
5 ZOOM*
1 or 2
1 to 10
0 [BRILLIANCE 2]
6 PULSE WIDTH
7 INT REJECT
8 ARPA
[0]
9 VIDEO PLOT
0 [FUNCTIONS 2]
[BRILLIANCE 2]
[9]
1 [BRILLIANCE 1]
2 PLOT BRILL
3 L/L GRID BRILL
4 CHART BRILL
[0]
OFF/DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
DIM/M1/M2/BRT
[FUNCTIONS 2]
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK (GRN CHAR)/
5 SYMBOLS BRILL DIM/M1/M2/BRT
BLK (RED CHAR)/
BLU (ECHO AREA)
BLU/
[RADAR 1]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
BRT BLU
3 ECHO STRETCH
OFF/1/2/3
2 EBL 1 *
3 EBL 2 *
4 VRM 1 *1
5 VRM 2 *1
6 TRAIL
REL/TRUE
REL/TRUE
NM/km
NM/km
REL/TRUE
4 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
[PULSE WD 1]
5 ECHO COLOR
6 SHIP SPEED
YEL/GRN/COLOR*
1 [RADAR 1] (FR2115/2125 OTHERS)
LOG/NAV*/MAN
MAN = xx.xKT
(STW/SOG)
2 0.5 NM
S1/S2
3 0.75 NM S1/S2/M1
S/M1
S/M1
4 1.5 NM
5 3 NM
6 6 NM
S1/S2/M1
S2/M1/M2/M3 S/M1/M2
M1/M2/M3/L M1/M2/L
7 TRAIL GRAD SGL/MULT
8 [PULSE WD 1]
9 [PULSE WD 2]
[8]
7 SET, DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET = xxx.x°
DRIFT=xx.xKT
NO.2 VRM/MAN
MAN = xx.xx NM
7 12-24 NM M2/M3/L
M2/L
0 [RADAR 2]
8 INDEX LINES
[0]
9 BRILLIANCE (1)
0 [FUNCTIONS 3]
[9]
[PULSE WD 2]
1 [RADAR 1] (FR2115/2125 OTHERS)
2 0.5 NM S1/S2
3 0.75 NM S1/S2/M1
[RADAR 2]
1 [RADAR 1]
2 + CURSOR, EBL REL/TRUE
3 NOISE REJECT OFF/ON
4 STERN MK*
5 SHIP'S MK
6 ALARM*
[3]
S/M1
S/M1
[FUNCTIONS 3]
4 1.5 NM
5 3 NM
6 6 NM
S1/S2/M1
S2/M1/M2/M3 S/M1/M2
M1/M2/M3/L M1/M2/L
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
IN/OUT
1 [FUNCTIONS 2]
2 [RADAR 1]
[2]
3 [FUNCTION KEY 1]
4 [FUNCTION KEY 2]
5 [FUNCTION KEY 3]
6 [FUNCTION KEY 4]
7 RADAR* *3 1/2
8
9 GYRO SETTING
EBL = xxx.x°
0 [FUNCTIONS 4]
7 12-24 NM M2/M3/L
M2/L
7 KEY BEEP*
8 AUDIO ALARM OFF*/L/M/H
9 2ND ECHO
0 [RADAR 3]
OFF/L/M/H
1
2
OFF/ON
[0]
[RADAR 3]
OFF/ON
1 [RADAR 2]
2 BARGE MK*2
3 BARGE SIZE*2 LENGTH=XXX ft
WIDTH = xx ft
4 [BARGE INFORMATION]*2
5 ORIGIN MK DISP No./SYMBOL
6 ORIGIN MK STAB GND/SEA
[4]
[BARGE INFORMATION]
1 [RADAR 3]
[4]
2
[FUNCTIONS 4]
0
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
0
0
0
0
2
7 ANTENNA REVOLUTION LOW/HIGH
3 TEST
8 RADAR NO.*
9 TUNE
1/2
MAN/AUTO
0 TUNE INITIALIZE
*: R-type only
*1: Fishing mode only (one type of R-type)
*2: SM only (one type of R-type)
*3: When RJ-7 is connected, changed to INTERSWITCH
R/N/W versions: Menu does not close automatically. On G version, the menu closes automatically
if no operation is made for 30 seconds.
-7.1-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
[3], [4] or [5]
[FUNCTION KEY 1]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
2 FUNCTION KEY 1 PICTURE/OPERATION
[FUNCTION KEY 4]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
2 FUNCTION KEY 4 OPERATION/WATCH ALARM
3 OPERATION TARGET TRAILS/
TARGET ALARM/ARPA/VECTOR TIME*
VIDEO PLOT/ZOOM*
BKGD COLOR/INDEX LINES/
INT REJECT/2ND ECHO/ORIGIN MARK/
PLS WD1/PLS WD 2/
(PICT)
(OPR)
3 PICTURE
FUNC1/BUOY/SHIP/
SHORT/LONG/CRUISING/
HARBOR/COAST/SEA/
ROUGH SEA/RIVER*2/BIRD*1
OFF/1/2/3
4 INT REJECT
5 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2/3
6 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
ECHO STRETCH 1/ 2/ 3
ECHO AVG 1/ 2 / 3
7 A/C AUTO
OFF/ON
ECHO COLOR/
8 [FUNC 1 PULSE WD]
CHAR BRILL/MARK BRILL/
TRAIL BRILL/RINGS BRILL/
EBL BRILL/VRM BRILL/
9 NOISE REJECT
0 VIDEO CONTRAST 1/2/3
OFF/ON
+CURSOR BRILL/HL BRILL/
POLT BRILL/L/L BRILL/
[8]
CHART BRILL/ NOISE REJECT/
BARGE MK*2
BARGE INFORMATION*2
[FUNC 1 PULSE WD]
1 [FUNCTION KEY 1]
2 0.5 NM
3 0.75 NM
4 1.5 NM
5 3 NM
6 6 NM
7 12-24 NM M2/M3/L
S1/S2
S1/S2/M1
S1/S2/M1
S2/M1/M2/M3
M1/M2/M3/L
Press [2] once or twice to toggle
between OPERATION and WATCH
ALARM followed by ENTER key.
(In the case of FR-2115/2125)
[2] [2] to toggle between
OPERATION and PICTURE menu.
(WATCH ALARM)
[FUNCTION KEY 4]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
2 FUNCTION KEY 4 OPERATION/WATCH ALARM
3 WATCH ALARM INTERVAL
[FUNCTION KEY 1]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
2 FUNCTION KEY 1 PICTURE/OPERATION
3 OPERATION TARGET TRAILS/
TARGET ALARM/ARPA/VECTOR TIME*
VIDEO PLOT/ZOOM*
(OPR)
6/10/12/15/20 MIN
BKGD COLOR/INDEX LINES/
INT REJECT/2ND ECHO/ORIGIN MARK/
PLS WD1/PLS WD 2/
ECHO STRETCH 1/ 2/ 3
ECHO AVG 1/ 2 / 3
ECHO COLOR/
CHAR BRILL/MARK BRILL/
TRAIL BRILL/RINGS BRILL/
EBL BRILL/VRM BRILL/
+CURSOR BRILL/HL BRILL/
PLOT BRILL/L/L BRILL/
CHART BRILL/ NOISE REJECT/
BARGE MK*2
BARGE INFORMATION*2
*: R-type only
*1: Fishing mode only (one type of R-type)
*2: SM only (one type of R-type)
-7.2-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[PLOT MENU] KEY
[EPA]
[RADAR MAP]
1 [NAV INFORMATION 1]
1 VECTOR TIME
2 COLLISION ALARM OFF/ON
CPA x.xNM
30SEC/1/2/3/6/12/15/30MIN
2 MAP
OFF/ON
3 MAP NO.
MAP xx
TCPA xx.xMIN
STD/LARGE
OFF/ON
MAP LIST
xx xx xx xx xx
xx xx xx xx xx
3 MARK SIZE
4 PLOT NO.
4 NAV DATA POSN
5 ALIGN +CURSOR DATA
6 MARK ENTRY MODE CURSOR/OWN SHIP POSN/L/L
7 [ENTER MAP]
8 [MAP DISP SELECT]
9 [MAP ERASE]
OFF/ON
[NAV MENU] KEY
(Radar only mode)
[1]
[NAV INFORMATION 1]
1 [RADAR MAP]
2 SELECT NAVAID
[7]
[8]
GPS+LC/DEAD
RECKONING
[ENTER MAP]
1 [RADAR MAP]
2 ENTER MAP MAP xx
[MAP DISP SELECT]
1 [RADAR MAP]
2 DANGER HIGHLIGHT OFF/ON
3 OWN SHIP POSN OFF L/L
4 POSN
xx°xx.xxx N/S
xxx°xx.xxx E/S
3 COAST LINE
4 MARK
5 NAV LINE
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
5 +CURSOR DATA
6 WPT DATA
7 [NAV LINE]
8 [WAYPOINT]
9 WIND DATA
OFF/L/L
OFF/REL/TRUE
6 PROHIBITED AREAS OFF/ON
7 BUOY
8 CONTOUR LINE
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
0 [NAV INFORMATION 2]
[0]
[NAV INFORMATION 2]
1 [NAV INFORMATION 1]
9 ERASE MAP MAP xx
[NAV LINE]
1 [NAV INFORMATION 1]
2 NAV LINE
2 WIND GRAPH
3 WIND UNIT
OFF/ON
m/s/KT
OFF/ON
xx - xx - xx - xx
OFF/ON
x.xxNM
OFF/ON
xx
(xx) - • -xx -
(xx) - • -xx -
VIDEO PLOTTER/NAVAID/OFF/ALL
OFF/ON
3 NAV LINE NO.
4 NAV WIDTH
4 CURRENT DATA
OFF/ON
[7]
5 CURRENT GRAPH OFF/ON
6 DEPTH DATA
7 DEPTH GRAPH
8 DEPTH SCALE
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
10/20/50/100/
200/500
m/ft
5 WPT NO.
6 WPT
9 DEPTH UNIT*1
7 NAV LINE DATA
8 ARRIVAL ALARM
0 [NAV INFORMATION 3]
[0]
[NAV INFORMATION 3]
x.xxNM
OFF/ON/REVISED
9 TURNING LINE
1 [NAV INFORMATION 2]
2 WATER TEMPERATURE* OFF/ON
[WAYPOINT]
1 [NAV INFORMATION 1]
3 DATE
OFF/UTC/LOCAL
±xx.xxH
2 WPT MARK
3 WPT
OFF/ON
[8]
4 USED WPL*
NAV LINE/WP
WPTxx
WPTxx
WPTxx
WPTxx
WPTxx
4 WPT LINE
5 WPT NO.
6
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
7
8 ARRIVAL ALARM
OFF/ON
x.xxNM
[MAP ERASE]
1 [RADAR MAP]
2 DANGER HILIGHT
3 COASTLINE
4 MARK
5 NAVLINE
6 PROHIBITED AREAS
7 BUOY
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
OFF/ALL
[9]
8 CONTOUR LINE
*1: R-type only
-7.3-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[VIDEO PLOTTER INITIAL SETTING]
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 2]
2 DANGER HIGHLIGHT
3 COAST LINE
4 LAND DENSITY
5 PLACE NAME
6 MARK
7 OWN SHIP PLOT
8 TARGET PLOT
9 CONTOUR LINE
0 GRID
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
NAV MENU key
(with RP-26)
*4
[1]
[VIDEO PLOTTER 1]
1 [NAV INFORMATION 1]
2 [WAY POINT]
[NAV INFORMATION 1]
1 [VIDEOPLOTTER 1]
2 SELECT NAVAID
3 OWN SHIP POSN
4 POSN
GPS DEAD RECKONING
OFF L/L
OO° OO.OOO N/S
OO° OO.OOO E/W
OFF/REL/TRUE
3 [NAV LINE]
4 [ENTER WPT, NAV LINE]
5 [CWN SHIP, TARGET PLOT]
6 CARD
REPLAY, RECORD
5 +CURSOR DATA
6 WPT DATA
7 [NAV LINE]
8 [WAY POINT]
9 WIND DATA
7 PLOTTER PRESENTATION DEFAULT/USER SET
8 [DISPLAY SELECT]
9 [ERASE]
[*4]
0 [VIDEO PLOTTER 2]
OFF/ON
0 [NAV INFORMATION 2]
[0]
[VIDEO PLOTTER 2]
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 1]
[0]
2 NAV DATA POSN
3 ALIGN DATA
4 OWN SHIP CENTER
5
6 MARK ENTRY MODE
7 TRAIL EAV
8 [VIDEO PLOTTER INITIAL SETTING]
OFF/ON
[NAV INFORMATION 2]
1 [NAV INFORMATION 1]
2 WIND GRAPH
3 WIND UNIT
OFF/ON
m/s/KT
[4]
CURSOR OWN SHIP POSN L/L
LOG GYRO
4 CURRENT DATA
5 CURRENT GRAPH
6 DEPTH DATA
7 DEPTH GRAPH
8 DEPTH SCALE
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
10/20/50/100/
200/500
m/ft
[3]
[OWN SHIP, TARGET PLOT]
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 1]
2 RECORD OWN SHIP PLOT
3 OWN SHIP PLOT INTVL 10/30SEC/1/2/3/6MIN
4 OWN SHIP PLOT COLOR RED/MAGENTA/
CYAN/BLU *5
[ENTER WPT, NAV LINE]
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 1]
2 [ENTER WPT]
3 [WPT LIST]
9 DEPTH UNIT*1
OFF/ON
0 [NAV INFORMATION 3]
[0]
4
5 [ENTER NAVLINE]
6 [NAV LINE LIST]
±XX.XH
[REPLAY CARD 1]
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 1]
2 FILE XXXXXXXXXX
3 FILE XXXXXXXXXX
4 FILE XXXXXXXXXX
5 FILE XXXXXXXXXX
6 FILE XXXXXXXXXX
7 FILE XXXXXXXXXX
8 FILE XXXXXXXXXX
9 FILE XXXXXXXXXX
4 USER CHART
5 CURVED EBL
6 CHART SYMBOL
7 NOTEBOOK
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
[2]
[ENTER NAV LINE]
1 [ENTER WPT NAV LINE]
2 NAV LINE ON
[ENTER WPT]
1 [ENTER WPT, NAV LINE]
WPT
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
2 ENTER WPT
3 WPT NO. OO
CURSOR/ L/L /OWN SHIP POSN
OO° OO.OOON/S
OOO° OO.OOOE/W
[RECORD]
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 1]
2 OWN SHIP PLOT
T
[3]
3 TARGET PLOT
4 MARK
5 RADAR MAP
A
M
R
[WPT LIST 1]
1 [ENTER WPT, NAV LINE]
WPT
6
7
8
9
8 ADDING
9 DESELECTING
WPTXX→XX
WPTXX
OO
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
XX° XX.XXXN
XXX° XX.XXXE
XX° XX.XXXN
XXX° XX.XXXE
XX° XX.XXXN
XXX° XX.XXXE
XX° XX.XXXN
XXX° XX.XXXE
XX° XX.XXXN
XXX° XX.XXXE
XX° XX.XXXN
XXX° XX.XXXE
XX° XX.XXXN
XXX° XX.XXXE
XX° XX.XXXN
XXX° XX.XXXE
XX° XX.XXXN
XXX° XX.XXXE
XX° XX.XXXN
XXX° XX.XXXE
WPTXX
0 FORMAT NO/YES
[PLOTTER DISP SELECT]
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 1]
2 DANGER HIGHLIGHT
3 COAST LINE
4 LAND DENSITY
5 PLACE NAME
6 MARK
7 OWN SHIP PLOT
8 TARGET PLOT
9 CONTOUR LINE
0 GRD
[NAV LINE LIST]
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
1 [ENTER WPT, NAV LINE]
NAV LINEXX XX XX
XX XX XX
*3
XX XX XX
OFF/SEPARATE/CONTINUE
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
[PLOTTER ERASE]
9 ERASE
NAV LINEXX
1 [VIDEO PLOTTER 1]
2 OWN SHIP PLOT
3 TARGET PLOT
4 MARK
9 ERASE
0 [WPT LIST 2]
30%/50%/80%/ALL
30%/50%/80%/ALL
OFF/ALL
*1: Fishing mode only (one type of R-type)
*2: Radar connected INS
*3: Items depend on the setting of
video plotter “Initial setting”.
5 WPT
OFF/ALL
6 NAV LINE
OFF/ALL
WAP LIST 2-10
*4: The NAV INFORMATION 1 menu appears by
pressing the NAV MENU key at the Radar only
display mode.
5* OWN SHIP PLOT COLOR not available on IMO type.
-7.4-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 ANCILLARY EQUPMENT
8.1 Performance Monitor
A performance monitor is required for a radar installed on vessels of 300 GT and upward
engaged in international voyages. For X-band radars, the FURUNO PM-30 or PM-50 satisfies
the requirement covering 9410 ± 50 MHz. For S-band radars, the PM-50 is available covering
3050 ± 30 MHz. The following describes how to use these performance monitors.
The performance monitor is an independent unit, namely, it is not interconnected with any unit
of the radar system except for the 100 VAC power cable. In some radars the power cable is not
routed via the power switch or other control of the radar and the monitor is operated as
completely a separate device.
Operating the performance monitor
When Radar Interswitch RJ-7 is connected, set it to the "straight" mode. Press the PM ON/OFF
button in the Turning Compartment, and the range scale is automatically set to 24 nm. The radar
screen will show several arcs, opposite to the heading marker (provided that the performance
monitor is installed behind the radar antenna as is normally the case). If the radar transmitter and
receiver are in good working conditions in as much as the original state when the monitor was
turned up, the innermost are should appear at 12 nm and there should be a total of 4 arcs.
The range of the innermost arc reduces 3 nm with every 3 dB loss of transmitted power.
Meanwhile the receiver sensitivity can be evaluated from the number of visible arcs; one arc is
lost every 3 dB deterioration of the sensitivity.
Transmitter performance
Receiver performance
Range to innermost arc
Loss
0 dB
Number of arcs
Loss
0 dB
12 nm
9 nm
4
3
2
1
0
3 dB
3 dB
6 nm
6 dB
6 dB
3 nm or less or none
> 10 dB
> 9 dB
> 12 dB
-8.1-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 nm
9 nm
12 nm
Transmitter: normal
Receiver: normal
Transmitter: 3 dB loss
Transmitter: 3 dB loss
(Transmitter system has lost a (Transmitter system has lost a
half of initial power. Suspect half of initial power. Suspect
magnetron and feeder system.) magnetron and feeder system.)
Receiver: normal
Receiver: 3 dB loss (Receiver
has lost a half of initial
sensitivity. Suspect receiver
front end, water ingress in
feeder system, etc.)
-8.2-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.2 Interswitching Unit
The interswitching unit RJ-7 permits independent or coordinated operation of two radar systems
among FR-2100 series, FR-2105 series and FR/FAR-2805 series. The following indicates the
menu structure for the guideline of use.
[FUNCTIONS 3]
1
[FUNCTIONS 2]
2 RADAR 1
3 FUNCTION KEY 1
4 FUNCTION KEY 2
5 FUNCTION KEY 3
6 FUNCTION KEY 4
7 RADAR
1/2
7 INTERSWITCH
8
9 GYRO SETTING
0 [FUNCTIONS 4]
↓ [7]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
2 DISPLAY 1
3 DISPLAY 2
→
→
ANT 1M
ANT 2M
4
5
2 ......
........1
6 STORE SETTING
7
8
9
0 [INITIAL SETTING RJ-7]
↓ [0]
[INITIAL SETTING RJ-7]
1 [INTERSWITCHING RJ-7]
2 ANTENNA 1 LOCATION
3 ANTENNA 2 LOCATION
4
5
..........
..........
Antenna height
6 STORE SETTING
7
8
9
0 SET DISPLAY NO.
1/2
-8.3-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.3 For Fishing Vessel
This radar can be customized as a fishing vessel version with an internal setting. The fishing
vessel version offers an additional picture setup option "BIRD," which is assignable to one of
the function keys depending on a setting on FUNCTION KEY 1, 2 or 3 menu shown below.
If the BIRD option is menu-selected at the time of installation, the corresponding function key is
labeled "BIRD." Press the function key "BIRD" and the radar will be set for optimum detection
of sea birds between 6 and 16 nm. As is well known by professional fishermen, locating a flock
of sea birds is useful for finding certain species of fish.
Press RADAR MENU
↓
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 TARGET TRAILS
2 GUARD ALARM
3 ORIGIN MARK
4 INDEX LINES
5 ZOOM
1 or 2
1 to 10
6 PULSE WIDTH
7 INT REJECT
8 ARPA
9 VIDEO PLOT
0 [FUNCTION 2]
↓
Press [0] key.
[FUNCTIONS 2]
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 BKGD COLOR BLK(GRN)/BLK(RED)/BLU
BLU/BRT BLU
3 ECHO STRETCH
OFF/1/2/3
4 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
5 TARGETS COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR
6 SHIP SPEED
7 SET, DRIFT
LOG/NAV/MAN
OFF/MAN SET = XXX
DRIFT =
8 INDEXLINES
NO.2 VRM/MAN
MAN = XX.XX NM
9 BRILLIANCE 1
0 [FUNCTION 3]
↓
Press [0] key.
[FUNCTIONS 3]
[FUNCTIONS 2]
[FUNCTIONS KEY 1]
1 [FUNCTIONS 3]
(PICT)
1
2 FUNC KEY1 PICTURE/OPERATION
2 RADAR 1
3 PICTURE
SHORT/LONG/CRUISING/
HARBOR/COAST/SEA/
ROUGH SEA/RIVER/BIRD
OFF/1/2/3*
3 FUNCTION KEY 1
4 FUNCTION KEY 2
5 FUNCTION KEY 3
6 FUNCTION KEY 4
7 RADAR
7 INTERSWITCH
8
→
Press [3], [4]
or [5] key. Ex.
[1] pressed.
4 INT REJ
5 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2/3
6 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
7 A/C AUTO OFF/ON*
1/2
8 [FUNC 1 PULSE WD]*
9 NOISE REJ
1/2/3*
9 GYRO SETTING
0 [FUNCTIONS 4]
0 VIDEO CONTRAST*
Note: Items marked * should be left in the default settings.
-8.4-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 Digital interface
(IEC 61162-1 Edition 1 and Edition 2)
1. I/O Sentences of Channel 1
Input
BWC, BWR, DBT, DPT, GGA, GLL, MWV, RMA, RMB, RMC, RTE, VDR,WPL, ZDA,
VTG (R-only)
Output
OSD (every 3 s), RSD (3 s)
2. I/O Sentences of Channel 2
Input
VBW, VHW, HDT
NOTE
Channel 2 serial port may be connected with a multiplexer interface box IF-2300 to feed Own
Ship speed, and Heading data.
3. I/O Sentence of Channel 3
Output
TTM (every 10 s when acquiring 10 targets)
4. Serial Signal I/O Circuit
See succeeding page.
NOTE: VDR is connected to the radar display unit via an optional integral interface board.
5. Sentence Description
See page 9-3 and after.
Sentence without checksum will not be accepted as a proper data.
-9.1-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLL
CHANNEL 2 INPUT
NAV RXD A
NAV RXD B
GND
VBW
IF-2300
HDT
-9.2-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description of Sentence
Channel 1 Input
BWC - Bearing and distance to waypoint - great circle
Waypoint ID
Mode indicator (A/D/E/M/S/N) *1
Checksum
Distance, nautical miles
Bearing, degrees magnetic*2
$--BWC, hhmmss.ss, 1111.11, a, yyyyy. yy, a, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N, c—c,a*hh<CR><LF>
Bearing, degrees true
Waypoint longitude, E/W
Waypoint latitude, N/S
UTC of observation *2
*1: Edition 2 only, *2: Not used
BWR - Bearing and distance to waypoint - rhumb line
Time (UTC) and distance and bearing to, location of, a specified waypoint from present position. $--BWR
data is calculated along the rhumb line from present position rather than along the great circle path.
Waypoint ID
Distance TO WPT, nautical miles
Bearing, degrees magnetic*2
Mode indicator (A/D/E/M/S/N) *1
Checksum
$--BWR, hhmmss.ss, 1111.11, a, yyyyy. yy, a, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N, c—c,a*hh<CR><LF>
Bearing, degrees true
Waypoint longitude, E/W
Waypoint latitude, N/S
UTC of observation *2
*1: Edition 2 only, *2: Not used
Note: The mode indicator character “a” has been defined as follows.
A= Autonomous mode
D= Differential mode
E= Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
M= Manual input mode
S= Simulator mode
N= Data not valid
-9.3-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DBT - Depth below transducer
Water depth referenced to the transducer.
$--DBT, x.x, f, x.x, M, x.x, F*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Water depth, fathoms
Water depth, m
Water depth, feet
DPT - Depth
IMO Resolution A.224 (VII). Water depth relative to the transducer and offset of the measuring transducer.
Positive offset numbers provide the distance from the transducer to the waterline. Negative offset numbers
provide the distance from the transducer to the part of the keel of interest.
Maximum range scale in use *1
$--DPT, x.x, x.x, x.x*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Offset from transducer, in meters = distance from transducer to water-line
Water depth relative to the transducer, in meters
*1: Edition 2 only, however not used
GGA - Global positioning system (GPS) fix data
Time, position and fix related data for a GPS receiver.
Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023 *1
Age of differential GPS data *1
Unit of geoid height, m *1
Geoid height (-999 - 0999) *1
Unit of antenna height, m *1
Antenna height (-9999 - 99999) *1
Checksum
Horizontal dilution of precision (00 - 99) *1
$--GGA, hhmmss.ss, 1111.11, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x, xx, x.x, x.x, M, x.x, M, x.x, xxxx*hh<CR><LF>
Number of satellite in use, 00-12
GPS quality indicator
0= fix not available or invalid
Longitude - E/W
1= GPS SPS mode, fix valid
Latitude - N/S
2= differential GPS, SPS mode, fix valid
3= GPS PPS mode, fix valid
UTC of position *1
*1: Not used
4= Real Time Kinematic. Satellite system
used in RTK mode with fixed integers
5= Float RTK. Satellite system used in RTK
mode with floating integers
6= Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
7= Manual input mode
8= Simulator mode
-9.4-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GLL - Geographic position - latitude/longitude
Latitude and longitude of vessel position, time of position fix and status.
Mode indicator (See note on page 9.3.) *1
$--GLL, 1111.11, a, yyyyy.yy, a, hhmmss.ss, A,a*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Status (A = data valid V = data invalid)
UTC of position *2
Longitude, E/W
Latitude, N/S
*1: Eidition 2 only, *2: Not used
MWV - Wind speed and angle
When the reference field is set to relative, data is provided giving the wind angle in relation to the vessel’s
heading and wind speed, both relative to the moving vessel.
When the reference field is set to true, data is provided giving the wind angle relative to the vessel’s
heading and wind speed, both with reference to the moving water. True wind is the vector sum of the
relative apparent wind vector and the vessel’s velocity vector along the heading line of the vessel. If
represents the wind at the vessel if it were stationary relative to the water and heading in the same direction.
$--MWV, x.x, a, x.x, a, A*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Status (A = data valid V = data invalid)
Wind speed unit (K/M/N)
Wind speed
Reference, R = relative
T = true
Wind angle (0° to 359°)
-9.5-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RMA - Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data
Position, course and speed data provided by a LORAN-C receiver. Time differences A and B are those used
in computing latitude/longitude. Checksum is mandatory in this sentence. This sentence is transmitted at
intervals not exceeding 2 s and is always accompanied by RMB when a destination waypoint is active. RMA
and RMB are the recommended minimum data to be provided by a LORAN-C receiver. All data fields must
be provided, null fields used only when data is temporarily unavailable.
Checksum, mandatory for RMA
Magnetic variation (000.0 - 179.9°), degrees E/W *2
Bearing, degrees *2
Speed over ground, knots 2*
Time difference B, 2*
(00000.0 - 99999.9 µs)
Time difference A, *2
(00000.0 - 99999.9 µs)
$--RMA, A, 1111.11, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, x.x, x.x, x.x, x.x, a,a*hh<CR><LF>
Mode indicator (See note on page 9.3.) *1
Longitude, degrees, E/W
Latitude, degrees, N/S
Status (A = data valid, V = blink, cycle or SNR warning)
*1: Edition 2 only, *2: Not used
RMB - Recommended minimum navigation information
Navigation data from present position to a destination waypoint provided by a LORAN-C, TRANSIT,
OMEGA, GPS, DECCA, navigation computer or other integrated navigation system. Checksum is
mandatory in this sentence. This sentence always accompanies RMA or RMC sentences when a destination
is active when provided by a LORAN-C, TRANSIT or GPS receiver, other systems may transmit $--RMB
without $--RMA or $--RMC.
Checksum, mandatory for RMB
Arrival status: A = arrival circle entered or perpendicular passed *2
Destination closing velocity, knots *2
Bearing to destination, degrees true
Range to destination, nautical miles
Waypoint longitude, E/W
$--RMB, A, x.x, a, c--c, c--c, 1111.11, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, x.x, x.x, A,a*hh<CR><LF>
Mode indicator (See note on page
9.3.) *1
Waypoint latitude, N/S
Destination waypoint ID
Origin waypoint ID*2
Direction to steer, (L = Port R = Starboard) *2
Cross track error , nautical miles *2
Status (A = data valid V = navigation receiver warning)
*1: Eidition 2 only, *2: Not used
-9.6-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RMC - Recommended specific GPS/TRANSIT data
Time, date, position, course and speed data provided by a GPS or TRANSIT navigation receiver.
Checksum is mandatory in this sentence. This sentence is transmitted at intervals not exceeding 2 s and is
always accompanied by RMB when a destination waypoint is active. RMC and RMB are the recommended
minimum data to be provided by a GPS or TRANSIT receiver. All data fields must be provided, null fields
used only when data is temporarily unavailable.
Checksum, mandatory for RMC
Magnetic variation (000.0 - 180.0°), degrees E/W *2
Date: dd/mm/yy *2
Course over ground, degrees*2
$--RMC, hhmmss.ss, A, 1111.11, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, x.x, xxxxxx, x.x, a,a*hh<CR><LF>
Mode indicator (See note on page
9.3.) *1
Speed over ground, knots*2
Longitude, E/W
Latitude, N/S
Receive status (V = navigation receiver warning)
UTC of position fix *2
*1: Eidition 2 only, *2: Not used
RTE - Routes
Waypoint identifiers, listed in order with starting waypoint first, for the identified route. Two modes of
transmission are provided: “c” indicates that the complete list of waypoints in the route is being transmitted;
“w” indicates a working route where the first listed waypoint is always the last waypoint that had been
reached (FROM), while the second listed waypoint is always the waypoint that the vessel is currently
heading for (TO), the remaining list of waypoints represents the remainder of the route.
$--RTE, x.x, x.x, a, c--c, c--c, ...... c--c*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Waypoint “n” identifier
Waypoint “1” identifier
Route identifier
Message mode (C = complete route, W = working route)
Message number
Total number of messages being transmitted
-9.7-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VDR - Set and drift
The direction towards which a current flows (set) and speed (drift) of current.
$--VDR, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N *hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Current speed, knots
Direction, degrees magnetic *1
Direction, degrees true
*1: Not used
WPL - Waypoint location
Latitude and longitude of specified waypoint
$--WPL, 1111.11, a, yyyyy.yy, a, c--c*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Waypoint number
Waypoint longitude, E/W
Waypoint latitude, N/S
ZDA - Time and date
UTC, day, month, year and local time zone.
$--ZDA, hhmmss.ss, xx, xx, xxxx, xx, xx*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Local zone description, minutes *1
Local zone description, hours *1
Year
Month, 01 to 12
Day, 01 to 31
UTC
*1: Not used
VTG – Course over ground and ground speed (R-type only)
The actual course and speed relative to the ground.
$--VTG, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N, x.x, K,a *hh<CR><LF>
Mode indicator (See note on page 9.3.) *1
Speed over ground, km/h
Speed over ground, knots
Course over ground, degrees magnetic
Course over ground, degrees true
*1: Eidition 2 only
-9.8-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel 1 output
RAOSD - Own ship data
$RAOSD,x.x,A,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Speed units, K/N/S (N-type only)
Vessel set (degrees true), drift (speed)
Vessel speed (See below)
Vessel course (degrees true), Course reference (See below)
Heading (degrees true), Heading status (A = data valid, V = data invalid)
Reference systems (speed course)
B: Botom tracking log
M: Manully entered
W: Water referenced
R: Radar tracking (of fixed target)
P: Positing system ground reference
RARSD - Radar system data
$RARSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Display rotation (C = course-up), H = head-up,
N = north-up)
Range units (K = km, N = nautical miles, S = statute
miles) (N-type only)
Range scale in use (0.125 - 120 nautical miles)
Cursor range and bearing from own ship (0.000 - 999.9
nautical miles, 0.0 - 359.9°)
Bearing line 2 (EBL2) (0.0 - 359.9°)
Variable range marker 2 range (VRM2) (0.000 - 999.9 nautical miles)
Origin 2 range and bearing from own ship (0.000 - 999.9 nautical miles,
0.0 - 359.9°)
Bearing line 1 (EBL1) (0.0 - 359.9°)
Variable range marker 1 range (VRM1) (0.000 - 999.9 nautical miles)
Origin 1 range and bearing from own ship (0.000 - 999.9 nautical miles, 0.0 - 359.9°)
-9.9-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel 2 input
VBW - Dual ground/water speed
$--VBW,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,A,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Status: stern ground speed *1
Stern transverse ground speed (knots) *1
Status: stern water speed *1
Stern transverse water speed (knots) *1
Speed status (A = data valid, V = data invalid)
Transverse ground speed (knots)
Longitudinal ground speed (knots)
Status (A = data valid, V = data invalid)
Transverse water speed (knots)
Longitudinal water speed (knots)
Priority N>km
*1: Edition 2 only
VHW - Water speed and heading
The compass heading to which the vessel points and the speed of the vessel relative to the water.
$--VHW, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N, x.x, K *hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Water speed, K = km/h
Water speed, knots
Priority: N>K
Heading (M = magnetic bearing)*1
Heading (T = true bearing)*1
*1: Not used
HDT
$HDT,x.x,T*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Heading, degrees true
-9.10-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel 3 output
RATTM - Tracked target message
$RATTM,xx,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,c---c,a,a,hhmmss.ss,a*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Type of acquisition (A/M/R) *1
Time of data (UTC)*2
Reference target = R, null otherwise
Target status
User data (e.g., target name) *2
Speed/distance unit (K/N/S) (N-type only)
Time to CPA (0-99.9 min)
CPA (00.00-99.99 nm)
Target course (degrees), true/relative (T/R)
Target speed
Bearing from own ship (degrees), true/relative (T/R)
Target distance from own ship
Target number (00 to 99)
*1: Edition 2 only, *2: Not used
-9.11-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 Parts List And Major Parts Location
1
FR-2105 series DISPLAY UNIT RDP-124
FR-2105-B series PROCESSOR UNIT, CONTROL UNIT AND MONITOR
Ｆ Ｕ Ｒ Ｕ Ｎ Ｏ
Model
Unit
FR-2105 Series/FR-2105-B Series
Display Unit RDP-124, Processor Unit RPU-011
電 気 部 品 表
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
99年 11月
M onitor RDP-124-M-ES, Control Unit RCU-011
Page
Ref.Dwg.
Blk.No.
E-1
SYMBOL
TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回 路 記 号
型 式
ｺｰﾄﾞ番 号
備 考
出 荷 単 位 組 品
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
03P9252, INT
03P9253, SPU
03P9254, PAL
03P9255, PNL
03P6256, PAR
HV9017A, HV
HV9017B, HV
プ リ ン ト 基 板
008-487-550
008-487-500
008-487-570
008-487-600
008-487-580
008-481-630
008-481-640
1B7
◯
◯
◯
◯
◯
◯
◯
1B8
1B9
1B10
1B11
1B13
FR-2115/2115-B
FR-2125/2125-B
U4
64P1106A, GC
004-412-220
008-473-650
008-487-640
008-487-660
008-487-620
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
◯
◯
◯
◯
◯
U5
18P9002B, ARP
14P0298, RP
U6
U6
14P0299, CARD I/F
03P9225, PM-IN
U18
CRT ASSY. PARTS
IRF19634G, MOS FET
2SC5301-YB, TR
CRT 組 品 部 品
000-790-215
000-790-216
000-790-217
000-790-218
000-790-219
000-790-220
000-790-221
000-790-222
000-790-223
000-790-224
000-790-255
◯
◯
◯
◯
◯
◯
◯
◯
◯
◯
◯
PCF18-01, FB TR
PBH172, MAIN PCB
PBH173, VIDEO PCB
PBH163, SW PCB
PBH183, RELAY PCB
PBH182, CRT SOCKET PCB
PBH207, CONNECTOR PCB
IF3-A10, PCB
M51LEQ180, CRT
CRT ASSEMBLY
CRT 組 品
1B15
CDT2136B, PDM9025
008-487-360
◯
PANEL ASSEMBLY
操 作 部 組 品
￣
PAL/PAR/PNL/TB301
008-487-370
008-487-390
Japanese
English
◯
◯
POWER BLOCK ASSY.
03P9245A, PTU
03P9245C, PTU
03P9245D, PTU
03P9245F, PTU
電 源 組 品
1B3
008-487-430
008-487-890
008-487-900
008-487-920
100/115VAC, 24rpm
100/115VAC, 42rpm
220VAC, 24rpm
◯
◯
◯
◯
220VAC, 42rpm
-10.1-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-2
Page
SYMBOL
TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回路記号
型式
ｺｰﾄﾞ番号
備考
出荷単位組品
POWER BLOCK ASSY.
03P9246A, PTU
03P9246C, PTU
電源組品
1B4
1B5
008-487-440
008-493-700
For DC, 24rpm
For DC, 42rpm
◯
◯
FILTER ASSY.
RPU-011
フィルター組品
008-487-470
008-487-480
008-492-460
For 100/115VAC
For 220VAC
For DC
RPU-011
RDP-124
◯
◯
COOLING FAN
ファンモーター
B1, B2
F1, F2
MMS-06C24DS-R01
000-128-409
w/cable
FUSE
ヒューズ
FGBO 5A AC250V
FGBO 10A AC125V
FGB0 20A AC125V
FGBO 0.5A AC125V
000-549-022
000-549-065
000-549-015
000-549-060
For 220VAC spec
For 100VAC spec
For DC spec
F1
F3
For DC spec
FILTER
フィルター
FL1
LF-210
000-588-410
SWITCH
S-331
スイッチ
S1
000-474-214
000-140-814
S2
LB-26WKS1
CABLE ASSEMBY
UL2464SB20P/1P
03-1918(6P)
ケーブル組品
000-140-813
008-487-000
008-486-940
008-487-010
008-487-040
008-487-020
008-487-050
008-487-030
008-487-060
008-486-970
008-486-960
008-487-070
008-486-980
008-486-930
008-487-080
008-487-090
W1
￣
￣
￣
￣
￣
￣
￣
￣
￣
￣
￣
￣
￣
￣
￣
P467-TB2
03-1912(6P)
P101-fuse
03-1919(3-3P)
03-1922(3-P3P)
03-1920(9-9P)
03-1923(P7-3,3P)
03-1921(10-10P)
03-1924(4-P2,P2P)
03-1915(3-3P)
03-1914(5-4P)
03-1925(P9-6,5P)
03-1916(6-14P)
03-1909(15-15P)
03-1926(SW-6P)
03-1927(6-6P)
P107-P481
P102-P583
P103-P415
P104-P582
P105-P413
P106-P121,P122
P401-P411
P446-P7(GC)
P466,P462-P581
P465-P1(GC)
P418-P560
S2-P315
P711(TB)-P311
-10.2-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
FR-2115/2125/2115-B/2125-B SCANNER UNIT RSB-0074/0075
ＦＵＲＵＮＯ
Model
Unit
FR-2115/2125/2115-B/2125-B
空中線部
RSB-0074/0075
電気部品表
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
98年 5月
SCANNER UNIT
Ref.Dwg.
Blk.No.
Page
E-3
SYMBOL
TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回路記号 型式
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
ｺｰﾄﾞ番号
備考
出荷単位組品
プリント基板
008-487-260
008-487-280
008-487-300
008-487-320
008-487-240
008-487-230
008-312-370
2B2
03P9243A, RFC
03P9243B, RFC
03P9244A, MD
03P9244B, MD
03P9232, IF
03P9242, TB
MP-3795
FR-2115
FR-2125
FR-2115
FR-2125
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2B3
2B4
2B6
2B7
SCANNER CHASSIS
RSB-0074
空中線筐体部
008-488-010
008-488-030
￣
￣
24rpm, w/o RF module
42rpm, w/o RF module
○
○
RSB-0075
RF MODULE
RTR-062
RFモジュール
008-487-160
008-490-680
008-487-170
￣
￣
￣
Except Japan 日本を除く
Japan only 日本のみ
○
○
○
RTR-063A
RTR-063
MIC AEEMBLY
RU-9253
MIC組品
U801
008-487-350
008-487-340
RTR-063
RTR-062
○
○
RU-9371
MOTOR
モーター
B801
D8G-516
000-631-715
000-136-566
000-140-764
24rpm, w/capacitor
42rpm, w/capacitor
25kW, w/cable
D8G-571
B802
109P0824H602
○
SWITCH
スイッチ
S901
RS-1 NO
000-478-301
DIODE
ダイオード
CR870
HVR-1X-40B
MD-12N1
000-121-156
000-133-735
000-121-156
FR-2115
FR-2125
CR871
HVR-1X-40B
DIODE LIMITER
RU-9099
ダイオードリミッター
CR880
000-126-369
CIRCULATOR
RC-3686
サーキュレータ
HY801
000-106-850
-10.3-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page
E-4
SYMBOL
TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回路記号
型式
ｺｰﾄﾞ番号
抵抗
備考
出荷単位組品
RESISTOR
ERF-10HMJ102
R899
000-123-395
TRANSFORMER
RT-9025
トランス
T801
000-123-823
000-123-394
FR-2115
FR-2125
RT-9023
MAGNETRON
MG5241
E3566
マグネトロン
000-100-036
000-141-073
000-140-762
V801
FR-2115 Except Japan 日本を除く
FR-2115 Japan only 日本のみ
FR-2125
MG5436
CABLE ASSEMBY
03-1903(2-R2P)
03-1904(13-13P)
ケーブル組品
008-486-910
008-486-920
W1
W2
-10.4-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
FR-2135SW/2135SW-B SCANNER UNIT RSB-0027/0032
ＦＵＲＵＮＯ
Model
Unit
FR-2135SW/2135SW-B
空中線部
RSB-0027/0032
SCANNER UNIT
電気部品表
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
99年 1月
Ref.Dwg. C3312-E02-D
Page
Blk.No.
E-5
SYMBOL
TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回路記号 型式
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
ｺｰﾄﾞ番号
備考
出荷単位組品
プリント基板
008-256-330
008-243-530
008-243-540
1B2
1B3
MP-7302
○
○
○
MSS-7497
MSS-7497A
220/200VAC
440/380VAC
MOTOR
モーター
B801
RM-7398
RM-7435
000-113-840-02
000-114-399-03
DIODE
ダイオード
CR3001
BCR-16C10R
000-132-186
DEICER
HEATER
ヒーター
HR3001
NDO-50040, 60W
NDO-50040, 60W
000-633-409
000-633-409
DEICER
DEICER
HR3002
RESISTOR
抵抗
R3004
ERD-25PJ221
000-330-341
DEICER
SWITCH
スイッチ
S801
S802
S3001
RS-1, NO
ATK21-W
000-478-301
000-479-243
000-478-160
TR-8B50-PDS2
DEICER
ENCODER
集積回路
U801
RSB-0026/0031-2/3
008-256-320
RE20F-120-100-B
-10.5-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
FR-2135SW/2135SW-B TRANSCEIVER UNIT RTR-047
ＦＵＲＵＮＯ
Model
Unit
FR-2135SW/2135SW-B
送受信部 RTR-047
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
電気部品表
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
99年 1月
Ref.Dwg. C3408-K01-A
Page
Blk.No.
E-6
SYMBOL
TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回路記号 型式
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
ｺｰﾄﾞ番号
備考
出荷単位組品
プリント基板
008-470-800
008-470-830
008-470-850
008-465-450
008-465-480
008-465-780
008-465-730
3B3
3B4
3B5
3B6
03P9189,INT
RFC-9008E,RFC
MD-9009A,MD
PTU-9185A,PTU
PTU-9185B,PTU
IF-9007,IF
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
AC100/115V
AC220/230V
3B7
3B8/9/10/11 MIC/ATT-7362
MIC,TR Limiter
MOTOR
モーター
B801
MMS-06C12DS-R02
000-128-408
FAN
CAPACITOR
コンデンサ
C890
ECQ-V1H104JLW
000-129-101
DIODE
ダイオード
000-133-735
000-133-735
CR871
MD-12N1
MD-12N1
CR870
FUSE
ヒューズ
F801
FGBO 0.5A, AC125V
FGBO-A 2A, AC125V
000-549-060
000-549-062
F802
FILTER
フィルタ
FL801
HY801
Q808
R889
V801
J810
LF-205A
000-588-411
CIRCULATOR
サーキュレータ
RC-4910S
000-126-346
TRANSISTOR
トランジスタ
2SB1259
000-116-180
RESISTOR
抵抗
ERF-10HMJ102
000-123-395
MAGNETRON
MG5223F
マグネトロン
000-109-081
JACK
ｼﾞｬｯｸ
WF3003E
000-158-022
-10.6-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page
E
-
7
SYMBOL
TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回路記号 型式
TRANSFORMER
ｺｰﾄﾞ番号
備考
出荷単位組品
トランス
T801
RT-9273
000-136-734
CABLE w/CONNECTOR
03-1034(6P)
03-1831(3P)
03-1839(2P)
03-1840(2P)
03-1838(3P)
コネクタ付ケーブル
008-242-870
008-465-510
008-465-600
008-465-610
008-465-590
NH Connetor
VH Connetor
VH Connetor
VH Connetor
VH Connetor
-10.7-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
FR-2125W/2125W-B SCANNER UNIT RSB-0076/77/78
ＦＵＲＵＮＯ
Model
Unit
FR-2125W/2125W-B
空中線部
RSB-0076/77/78
電気部品表
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
SCANNER UNIT
Ref.Dwg. C3333-K01-E
Page
99年 1月
Blk.No.
E-8
SYMBOL
TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回路記号 型式
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
ｺｰﾄﾞ番号
備考
出荷単位組品
プリント基板
008-391-430
008-391-450
008-391-420
008-500-090
2B3
2B4
2B5
2B6
MP-8161,MP
BP-8162,BP
MPT-8226,MPT
03P9263,DE-ICER
For 1φ MOTOR
OPTION
MOTOR
モーター
B801
RM-8123
RM-8124
RM-8247
000-117-822
000-117-823
000-117-824
200/220VAC,3φ:RSB-0076
380/440VAC,3φ:RSB-0077
100VAC,1φ:RSB-0078
SWITCH
スイッチ
S801
S802
S3001
RS-1 NO
000-478-301
000-478-301
000-478-160
ATK21-W
TR-8B50PDS2
DIODE
ダイオード
CR3001
BCR-16C10RS
000-141-122
RESISTOR
抵抗
R3004
ERD-25PJ221
000-330-341
-10.8-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
FR-2125W/2125W-B TRANSCEIVER UNIT RTR-046
ＦＵＲＵＮＯ
Model
Unit
FR-2125W/2125W-B
送受信部
RTR-046
電気部品表
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
99年 1月
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
Ref.Dwg. C3405-K01-B
Page
Blk.No.
E-9
SYMBOL
TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回路記号 型式
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
RF
ｺｰﾄﾞ番号
備考
出荷単位組品
プリント基板
008-465-420
008-470-800
008-470-820
008-470-840
008-465-450
008-465-480
008-465-490
008-465-470
3B3
3B5
3B6
3B7
3B8
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
03P9189,INT
RFC-9008D,RFC
MD-9009,MD
PTU-9185A,PTU
PTU-9185B,PTU
IF-9007,IF
AC100/115V
AC220/230V
3B9
3B10
MIC-6550,MIC
MIC,TR Limiter
MOTOR
モーター
B801
MMS-08C24DH-R
000-128-410
CAPACITOR
コンデンサ
C890
ECQ-V1H104JLW
000-129-101
DIODE
ダイオード
000-133-735
000-133-735
CR871
MD-12N1
MD-12N1
CR870
FUSE
ヒューズ
F801
FGBO 0.5A, AC125V
FGBO-A 2A, AC125V
000-549-060
000-549-062
F802
FILTER
フィルタ
FL801
HY801
J810
LF-205A
000-588-411
CIRCULATOR
RC-3686
サーキュレータ
000-106-850
JACK
ジャック
WF3003E
000-518-022
TRANSISTOR
トランジスタ
Q808
2SB1259
000-116-180
RESISTOR
抵抗
R889
ERF-10HMJ102
000-123-395
-10.9-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page
E-10
SYMBOL
TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回路記号 型式
TRANSFORMER
ｺｰﾄﾞ番号
備考
出荷単位組品
トランス
T801
V801
CR880
RT-9023
000-123-394
MAGNETRON
マグネトロン
M5187F
000-101-760
TR LIMITER
RU-9290
TRリミッタ
000-136-735
-10.10-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
FR-2155/2155-B SCANNER UNIT RSB-0049/0050
ＦＵＲＵＮＯ
Model
Unit
FR-2155/2155-B
空中線部
RSB-0049/0050
電気部品表
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
98年 12月
SCANNER UNIT
Ref.Dwg. C3353-K03-D
Blk.No.
Page
E-11
SYMBOL
TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回路記号 型式
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
ｺｰﾄﾞ番号
備考
出荷単位組品
プリント基板
008-312-370
008-415-220
008-256-140
008-415-190
008-415-200
008-414-650
008-415-210
2B2
2B4
2B5
2B6
2B7
2B8
2B9
MP-3795,MP
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
03P666C,RTB
03P6668,PFN.1.
03P6669B,PFN2
03P6827B,MAG
IF6734C
03P9004,INT
SCANNER CHASSIS
RSB-0049-N
空中線筐体部
008-414-310
008-414-320
008-414-340
008-414-340
￣
￣
￣
￣
24 VDC
24 VDC
220 VAC
220 VAC
○
○
○
○
RSB-0049-I
RSB-0050-N
RSB-0050-I
RF MODULE
RTR-030
RFモジュール
008-414-520
2B3
○
MIC ASSEMBLY
RTR-030
MIC 組品
008-415-270
MIC-6550, S-RX24
MOTOR
モーター
B801
G0B-8222
RM-6585
MU1025S-11
109-180
000-123-333-01 220 VAC (RSB-0049)
000-106-770
000-116-647
000-105-416
24 VDC (RSB-0050)
B802
B803
SWITCH
スイッチ
S801
RS-1 NO
ATK 21W
000-478-301
000-479-243
S802
DIODE LIMITER
ダイオードリミッター
CR810
HY801
T801
BS-4122/E3902
000-116-043
CIRCULATOR
RC-3686
サーキュレータ
000-106-850
TRANSFORMER
RT-9028
トランス
000-123-335
-10.11-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page
E-12
SYMBOL
TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回路記号 型式
MAGNETRON
ｺｰﾄﾞ番号
備考
出荷単位組品
マグネトロン
000-106-012
V801
M4505E
CABLE ASSEMBY
ケーブル組品
008-414-450
008-414-440
008-414-430
03-1451 (P2P)
ML CONNECTOR
03-1450 (FAN-R3P)
03-1449 (SW-2P)
M-ML CONNECTOR
S-NH CONNECTOR
RELAY
リレー
K801
K802
K803
VF-12HU-UL
VF-12HU-UL
VF-12HU-UL
000-108-676
000-108-676
000-108-676
DIODE
DIODE
CR803
CR804
CR804
CR813
CR814
CR815
V19E-AB2
V19E-AB2
V19E-AB2
SH16J12U
SH16J12U
SH16J12U
000-136-019
000-136-019
000-136-019
000-135-165
000-135-165
000-135-165
COIL
コイル
U801
RL-9029
000-123-334
-10.12-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
FR-2135S/2135S-B SCANNER UNIT RSB-0026/0031/0088/0089/0090
電気部品表
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
SCANNER UNIT
Ref.Dwg. C3469-K01-B
Page
98年 11月
Blk.No.
E-13
SYMBOL TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回路記号 型式
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
ｺｰﾄﾞ番号
備考
出荷単位組品
プリント基板
008-488-220
008-488-230
008-488-240
008-487-230
008-256-330
008-243-530
008-243-540
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B6
1B7
1B8
03P9243D, RFC
03P9244C, MD
03P9232A, IF
03P9242, TB
MP-7302
X
X
X
X
X
X
MSS-7497
200/220VAC
380/440VAC
MSS-7497A
ASSEMBLY
組品
RSB-0026/31-066
RSB-0026/31-066
RSB-0026/31-066
008-491-530
008-491-580
008-493-020
AMP/MIC
X
X
X
U801
MIC RU-9427
TR CHASSIS, RFC, MD
SCANNER CHASSIS
RSB-0026-066-N
RSB-0026-066-I
空中線筐体部
008-493-470
008-493-480
008-493-490
008-493-500
008-493-510
008-493-520
008-493-530
008-493-540
008-525-300
008-525-400
008-525-050
008-525-060
008-525-070
008-525-080
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
RSB-0026-066-N-HK
RSB-0026-066-I-HK
RSB-0031-066-N
RSB-0031-066-I
RSB-0031-066-N-HK
RSB-0031-066-I-HK
RSB-0088-066-N
RSB-0088-066-I
RSB-0089-066-N
RSB-0089-066-I
RSB-0090-066-N
RSB-0090-066-I
MOTOR
モーター
B801
B802
RM-7398
RM-7435
RM-9519
RM-9520
RM-9521
109E1224M102
000-113-840
000-114-399
000-144-850
000-144-851
000-144-852
000-109-412
200/220VAC
440/380VAC
220VAC, 3Φ, 50Hz
220VAC, 3Φ, 60Hz
440VAC, 3Φ, 60Hz
-10.13-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page
E-14
SYMBOL TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回路記号 型式
ｺｰﾄﾞ番号
備考
出荷単位組品
CAPACITOR
コンデンサ
000-129-260
C890
Q15
ECQ-V1H104JL3
TRANSISTOR
トランジスタ
2SB946P
000-133-053
DIODE
ダイオード
CR870
CR871
CR880
MD-12N1
HVR-1X-40B
RU-9426
000-133-735
000-121-156
000-141-060
000-132-186
DIODE LIMITTER
DEICER
CR3001 BCR-16C10R
HEATER
ヒーター
HR3001 NDO-50040, 60W
HR3002 NDO-50040, 60W
000-633-409
000-633-409
DEICER
DEICER
RESISTOR
抵抗
R899
1K/10
000-123-823
000-330-341
R3004
ERD-25PJ221
DEICER
SWITCH
スイッチ
S801
S802
S3001
RS01, NO
ATK21-W
000-478-301
000-479-243
000-478-160
TR-8B50-PDS2
DEICER
TRANSFORMER
トランス
T801
HY801
V801
U802
RT-9273
000-136-734
PULSE TRANS.
CIRCULATOR
サーキュレータ
RC-6584S
000-126-345
MAGNETRON
マグネトロン
MG5223F
000-109-081
ROTARY ENCODER
ﾛｰﾀﾘｰｴﾝｺｰﾀﾞ
RE20F-120-100-B
000-113-271
w/CONNECTOR ASSY.
03-1967(P2P)
コネクタ組品
008-491-450
008-491-420
008-491-470
008-491-430
008-491-470
03-1965(3P)
03-1969(6P)
03-4966(13-13P)
03-1969(6P)
-10.14-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
FR-2135S/2135SW/2135S-B/2135SW-B POWER SUPPLY UNIT PSU-004
ＦＵＲＵＮＯ
Model
Unit
FR-2135S/2135SW/2135S-B/2135SW-B
電源制御部 PSU-004
電気部品 表
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
98年 11月
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Ref.Dwg. C3385-K01-D
Page
Blk.No.
E-14
SYMBOL
TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
回 路記 号 型 式
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
ｺｰﾄﾞ番 号
備 考
出 荷単 位組 品
プ リン ト基 板
008-451-750
B2
03P9146
○
FUSE
ヒ ュー ズ
F1, F2
FGBO 10A AC125V
FGBO 2A AC250W
000-549-065
000-549-020
F3
RELAY
リ レー
K1
HG3-DC12V
000-454-822
000-137-509
000-137-508
000-454-755
K2
TR-0NH/3, 1.7A
TR-0NH/3, 0.8A
SP2-DC12V
For RSB-0026/0088/0089
For RSB-0031/0090
K3
-10.15-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY UNIT, TOP VIEW and BOTTOM VIEW
CRT
CDT2136B
PDM board
PDM9025
Main board
for CRT
Display Unit (Rear view, CRT block lifred)
PTU board
03P9245
Noise Filter
MB board
03P9251
HV board
HV9017
INT board
03P9252
GC board
64P1106
RP board
14P0298
SPU board
03P9253
ARP board
18P9002
-10.16-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRACKBALL
EUA-FTF814B
PNL board
03P9255
PAR board
03P9256
RUBBER KEY-R
03-144-1652
RUBBER KEY
03-144-1651
PAL board
03P9254
EXPLODED VIEW OF DISPLAY UNIT CONTROL HEAD
-10.17-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FR-2115/2125/2115-B/2125-B ANTENNA UNIT, SCANNER OUTLINE and RF MODULE
S901
TB board
03P9242
RF module
Scanner Unit
IF board
03P9232
MIC assy
RU-9253 for RTR-063
RU-9371 for RTR-062
Diode limiter
RU-9099
RFC board
03P9243
T R - 0 6 * * * K W
R
RF module, top view
-10.18-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
View Point "A"
FAN MOTOR ASSY
03-1900
C
B
J811
J812
A
PULSE TRANSFORMER
RT-9025 for RTR-062
RT-9023 for RTR-063
4
6
MAGNETRON
MG5241 for RTR-062 (12 kW, X)
MG5436 for RTR-063 (25 kW, X)
View Point "A"
RF MODULE
A magnetron has strong magnetism. Do not bring a ferrous material in close contact with
it. Do not place the magnetron on a steel table.
For further information on parts location and how to replace components, refer to the Service
Manual which will be available at extra cost.
-10.19-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FR-2125W/2125W-B TRANSCEIVER UNIT
Checkmeter SW
M801 S840
Fuse
F802
Hourmeter
HM801
Fuse
F801
Overcurrent Lamp
CR51
Registor
R811, R812
P801
P601
J651
Transceiver module
PTU pcb
PTU-9185A (110-115 VAC)
PTU-9185B (220-230 VAC)
Checkmeter pcb
(CM-5146)
Terminal TB806
Filter FL801
Terminal RTB-2
Outlet
J806
Terminal
Transformer
T804
-10.20-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TR Limiter
(RU-9290)
IF Amp
MIC
(S-RX24)
J601
J801
Circulator
(RC-3686)
Triger
(RFC-9008)
Pulse Transformer T801
Leed wire for Magnetron
SCR
CR813, CR814
Magnetron
(M5187F)
FAN
B802
MD-9009, pcb
-10.21-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FR-2125W/2125W-B SCANNER UNIT
Heater for de-ice
(option)
Scanner motor
B801
Motor switch
S802
De-icer temperature senser
(option)
Right Side
HL switch
CR3001
STB-3
STB-2
STB-1
MP-8161 pcb
BP-8162 pcb
Left Side
-10.22-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HL switch
STB-3
MPT-8226 pcb
MP-8161 pcb
STB-2
STB-1
BP-8162 pcb
Left Side
-10.23-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FR-2135SW/2135SW-B TRANSCEIVER UNIT
Modulation board
MD-9009
Magnetron
MG5223F
MOD TRIGGER
board
RFC-9008
Pluse Transformer
RT9273
RTR-047 Transformer unit
Fuse
0.5A
Fuse
2A
Power supply
PTU-9185
FILTER
LF-205A
Terminal board
-10. 24-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diode limiter
RU-8715
MIC
MIC-6681
RTR-047 Transformer unit
IF amp
IF-9007
Door switch
Ventilation for (Behind)
Diode limiter
RU-8715
Diode limiter
RU-7394
ATT board
ATT-7362
Circulator
RC4910S
RTR-047 Transformer unit
-10. 25-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FR-2135SW/2135SW-B SCANNER UNIT
Rotary encoder
U801
Antenna motor
B801
Scanner Unit (left side)
MP-7302 pcb
MSS-7497 pcb
Terminal Board
STB1
Scanner Unit (right side)
-10. 26-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FR-2155/2155-B SCANNER UNIT
Safty switch
S802
MP-3795 pcb
Terminal board
STB-3
De-ice sensor
(Option)
Terminal board
STB-1
Motor
B801
Gland
(2-A30, 1-A25)
Terminal board
STB-2
Gear
RF module
RTR-030
-10. 27-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RTB pcb
(C03P6666)
MIC
Pulse
transformer
IF Amp pcb
(C IF-6734)
Relay pcb
(03P9004)
RF module RTR-030
Magnetron pcb
(B 03P6827)
PFN.1. pcb
(03P6668)
PFN.2. pcb
(03P6669)
Magnetron
9M31/M4505E
RF module RTR-030
-10. 28-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FR-2165DS SCANNER UNIT
TB STB-2
TB STB-3
MIC
IF AMP
03P6570
J/P910
J/P601
TB STB-1
Left side
RF module
J829
R812
R811
MD pcb
Magnetron
RTB pcb
[C]03P6666
Relay pcb
[A]03P9004
Pulse transformer
T801
CR808/809
Right side
-10. 29-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FAN motor
B802
[A]MP-3795 pcb
Magnetron
V801
Scanner motor
B801
Scanner Unit (righ side)
[A]03P6827 pcb
J821
Pulse transformer
T801
Choke coil
L801
Thyristor CR815
Thyristor CR814
Thyristor CR813
Relay
K801-K803
MD pcb
03P6668
PFN pcb
[c]03P6669
RF module
-10. 30-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FR-2135S/2135S-B SCANNER UNIT
RSB-0026 RM-7398 200/220 VAC 3φ 50/60 Hz
RSB-0031 RM-7435 380/440 VAC 3φ 50/60 Hz
RSB-0088 RM-9519 220 VAC 3φ 50 Hz
RSB-0089 RM-9520 220 VAC 3φ 60 Hz
RSB-0090 RM-9521 440 VAC 3φ 60 Hz
-10. 31-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIMPLIFIED INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
(See Installation Manual for terminal connections)
RW-4873
(25C + 2C2V)
RJ-7 INTERSWITCH
EXTERNAL SIG IN
J457
J458
DJ1 (MB)
TB801
ANTENNA SCANNER
CHANNEL 1 PORT
OUT: OWN SHIP DATA
INPUT: GLL
J450
(Channel1)
TB1
SHIP'S MAINS
CHANNEL 2 PORT
INPUT:
SDME (VBW)
GYRO (HDT)
GYRO CONV
GC-8
J455
(Channel 2)
IF-2300
GYROCOMPASS
OR
GYRO CONVERTER
J446
CHANNEL 3 OUTPUT for
ARPA (TTM)
J454
J448
J444
SDME (speed pulse)
03P9
(Optional)
J472
J473
J474
EXT ALARM
Radar Video, Trigger, Azimuth,
HDG for EXT ARPA (TTM)
J475
J442
SLAVE DISPLAY
Interface
optional
J449
VDR (RGB video)
J443
SLAVE DISPLAY
03P9225
(Optional)
Not used
J453
J456
J402
J403
P. MONITOR
BUZZER
RS 232C
(ALTERNATIVE TO
RS 422 AT J450)
J452
J463
J445
+12V, +5V
SPARE
Note: The FR-2105/2105-B series radar does not process the IEC61162-2 data.
Therefore, the system may only work as HSC radar by receiving data of gyrocompass
data thru GC-8 or AD-100.
-10. 32-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RF Module RTR-062: 12 kW
RF Module RTR-063: 25 kW
03P9242 (TB)
TB801
TO
RADIATOR
P911
P912
P811
JB11
JB12
J911
J912
P821 J821
P801
T801
P813
P814
J813
J814
V801
Magnetron
J802 P802
P812
J801
HY801
Circulator
RC-3686
C890
0.1
03P9243 (RFC)
A: 12 kW
B: 25 kW
03P9244 (MD)
A: 12 kW
B: 25 kW
CR870
CR871
MVR-IX-408
J915
R899
1k/10
CR880
RU-9099
DIODE
LIMITER
J803
P803
M
B892
SCANNER
MOTOR
P611
P913
J913
J611
U801
MIC MODULE
P612
J612
03P9232 (IF)
J902
J914 P914
P901 J901
P902
S901
MP-3795
B801
24 rpm: D8G-516
42 rpm: D8G-571
M
C911
0.47
ANTENNA UNIT
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(For more detail, refer to installation manual or service manual.)
-10. 33-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|